HomeMy WebLinkAboutFile Documents.401 Castle Creek Rd.0071.2018 (3).ACBK PROJECT MANUAL
Volume I Divisions 0 through 14
ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY
100% Construction Documents
Issued: May 9, 2018
Architect’s Project Number: 1740
OWNER:
Pitkin County, CO
ARCHITECT: Chamberlin Architects, P.C. (AOR) 437 Main Street Grand Junction, CO 81501 (970) 242-6804
Studio B 501 Rio Grande Plaza, Suite 104 Aspen, CO 81611 (970) 920-9428
CIVIL ENGINEER: Roaring Fork Engineering 592 Highway 133 Carbondale, CO 81623 (970) 340-4130
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: Lift Studio, LLC 442 Paepcke Dr #102 Aspen, CO 81611 (970) 404-5610
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Lindauer-Dunn, Inc. 802 Rood Avenue Grand Junction, CO 81501 (970) 241-0900
MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Ralston Mechanical Consulting 356 Echo Canyon Court Grand Junction, CO 81507 (970) 434-9819
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Grand Valley Engineering Solutions 334 Dakota Circle Grand Junction, CO 81503 (970) 256-0353
06/08/2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOL I 1
Contracting Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
007000 GENERAL CONDITIONS
008000 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY
012300 ALTERNATES
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
022114 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033543 POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
DIVISION 05 – METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING
053100 STEEL DECKING
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
055113 METAL PAN STAIRS
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
06/08/2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOL I 2
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
061600 SHEATHING
064116 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
064600 WOOD TRIM
066400 PLASTIC PANELING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
072119 FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION
072600 VAPOR RETARDERS
072726 FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
074213.16 METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
074293 SOFFIT PANELS
075423 THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
079219 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083613 SECTIONAL DOORS
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
088300 MIRRORS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
093013 CERAMIC TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
098433 SOUND ABSORBING WALL UNITS
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099735 FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS
06/08/2018
TABLE OF CONTENTS – VOL I 3
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101100 VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
101419 DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
101423 PANEL SIGNAGE
102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
104410 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
105113 METAL LOCKERS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
113100 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
123600 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS
123661.16 SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
123661.19 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS
124813 ENTRANCE MATS RECESSED
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
142400
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS VOL I
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 7000 - 1
SECTION 00 7000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, 2007 Edition,
Articles 1 through 14 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is incorporated as fully as if here
set forth.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 00 7000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -1
SECTION 00 8000 - SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
These Supplementary Conditions modify the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA
Document A201-2007, and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All
provisions which are not so modified remain in full force and effect. In the event of inconsistency or
ambiguity between said General Conditions and these Supplementary Conditions, the terms of these
Supplementary Conditions shall govern.
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-2007, have the meanings assigned to them in the
General Conditions. The Parties agree that Asset Engineering Limited is the Contractor and Mesa County
Valley School District 51 is the “Owner” for purposes of these Supplementary Conditions and the
General Conditions, and the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (referred to in the General
Conditions as the “Agreement”) is the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
Add the following subsections:
§1.1.9 Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems
forming the Work, but does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,
fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work.
§1.1.10 Furnish: To supply and deliver, unload, inspect for damage.
§1.1.11 Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, and make
ready for use.
§1.1.12 Provide: To furnish and install.
§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Add the following to the end of § 1.2.1:
Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, and drawings, the
more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. The precedence of the
Construction Documents is in the following sequence:
1) Addenda and modifications to the Drawings and Specifications take precedence
over the original construction documents.
2) Should there be a conflict within or between the Specifications and the Drawings,
the Owner shall decide which stipulation will provide the best installation and the
Owner’s decision shall be final.
§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER
INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -2
§1.5.2 Add the following to the end of the last sentence: “, except that the written consent of
Architect or Architects consultant shall not be required if such use is authorized by
Owner pursuant to Section 3.3 of the AIA B102 – 2007 Agreement between Owner and
Architect.”
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
Delete § 2.2.1
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§3.1 GENERAL
§3.1.1 Delete the first sentence and substitute the following: “The Contractor is the person or
entity identified as the Construction Manager in the Agreement and is referred to
throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.”
§ 3.5 WARRANTY
Add the following subsection:
§3.5.2 Neither the Owner’s approval of the final Request for Payment nor payment of any
Request for Payment or of any sum previously withheld from the Contractor shall relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for its warranty and guarantee hereunder or for faulty
materials or workmanship. Unless otherwise agreed, Contractor unconditionally agrees
to remedy any defects due thereto, and pay for any damages resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion.
§ 3.6 TAXES
Delete and add the following subsections:
§ 3.6.1 The Owner is exempt from the collection and payment of state and county sales and use
taxes on any materials, supplies or other equipment used or installed in the Work. The
Cost of the Work and Contract Sum shall not include the cost of any such taxes. It shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor and all subcontractors to complete and file an
“Application for Exemption Certificate” with the Colorado Department of Revenue.
Copies of all tax exemption certificates shall be furnished to the Owner prior to
commencement of the Work.
§ 3.6.2 The Contractor shall comply with applicable municipal ordinances concerning sales and
use taxes on required materials permanently in the work. It is specifically understood and
agreed that any refund of taxes paid shall become the property of the Owner. The
Contractor and subcontractors shall keep all required records and upon completion of the
project, furnish the Owner with certificates and listing of Invoices as required to allow
the Owner to obtain refund of all city taxes paid.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -3
FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
Add the following subsection:
§ 5.2.5 Each Subcontract shall be in writing and shall specify that (i) the Owner is an intended
third party beneficiary of such Subcontract; and that (ii) it shall be assignable to the
Owner without any restriction. Contractor shall not allow a Subcontractor to commence
work without an executed Subcontract with the Contractor in accordance with Sections
5.1, 5.2, 5.3, and 5.2.6. Contractor must execute all subcontracts in a timely manner so
no delays in the Work are realized. Contractor shall promptly provide a copy of all
contracts with Subcontractors to Owner’s Representative.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
Delete § 8.1.2
§8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
Add the following subsection:
§ 8.2.4 It is agreed that time is of the essence and that the Owner will suffer substantial damages
if the Work is not completed within the time stated in the Agreement. Owner and
Contractor acknowledge and agree that in the event Contractor fails to achieve
Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time (as such may be extended
in accordance with the Contract Documents), Owner will suffer, as a result of
Contractor’s failure, substantial damages which are both extremely difficult and
impracticable to ascertain. Therefore, if the Project is delayed beyond the date set for
Substantial Completion of the Contract without a Change Order for extension of the
Contract Time, Contractor shall pay to the owner as liquidated damages, and not as a
penalty, the amount of $0.00 per day for each day of delay to the Contract Time.
§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
§8.3.1 Delete the words “or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control.”
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
§ 9.5.1 Add the following to this subsection:
.8 Failure of the Contractor to submit Progress Charts in comparison to Progress Schedule
with application for payment.
.9 Failure to comply with any laws, ordinances, regulations or orders of any public authority
governing the performance of the Work.
The Owner shall make monthly progress payments as described in § 9.6 until the
scheduled (including time extensions made by change order) time for Substantial
Completion. If the Project is not substantially complete at this time, the Owner will not
make further progress payments until the Project reaches Substantial Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -4
§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 9.8.1 Add the following:
and all major systems are operational and all life safety features are completed.
§9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
Delete § 9.9.1 and substitute the following:
§ 9.9.1 The Contractor agrees to the use and occupancy of a portion or unit of the project before
formal Acceptance by the Owner under the following conditions:
1) A Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be prepared and executed as provided
in Subsection 9.9.1 of the General Conditions of the Contract, except that when, in
the opinion of the Owner, the Contractor is chargeable with unwarranted delay in
completing work or other contract requirements, the signature of the Contractor will
not be required. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be accompanied by
a written endorsement of the Contractor’s insurance carrier and surety permitting
occupancy by the Owner during the remaining period of Project Work.
2) Occupancy by the Owner shall not be construed by the Contractor as being
acceptance of that part of the Project to be occupied.
3) The Contractor shall not be held responsible for any damage to the occupied part of
the Project resulting from the Owner’s occupancy.
4) Occupancy by the Owner shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of any claims on
behalf of the Owner or Contractor against each other.
Use and occupancy by the Owner prior to Project acceptance does not relieve the
Contractor of its responsibility to maintain all insurance and bonds required of the
Contractor under the Contract until the Project is completed and accepted by the Owner.
§9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
§9.10.1 Delete the last sentence and add the following:
If the work is completed, but Substantial Completion thereof shall be prevented through
delay or correction of minor defects or unavailability of materials or other causes beyond
the control of the Contractor, the Owner at its discretion may release to the Contractor
such amounts as may be in excess of three times the cost of completing the unfinished
work or the cost of correcting the defective work.
§9.10.2 Add the following to this subsection:
(6) all guarantees, warranties, and certificates, (7) operating and maintenance manuals,
(8) identification lists of materials and equipment, (9) Inspection Certificates, (10) record
documents, and (11) City Sales/Use Tax records: and the Contractor has demonstrated to
the Owner the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -5
§9.10.4 Add the following to this subsection:
.4 faulty or defective Work first appearing or discovered after Substantial Completion.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
§11.1 - CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§11.1.1 Add the following to this subsection:
The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall obtain and maintain throughout the life of the Project, the
following insurance:
1) Workmen’s compensation: amounts and coverage as required by law and employer
liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000.
2) Commercial general liability:
a) Per occurrence: $1 million
b) General aggregate: $3 million
c) Products – completed operations per occurrence: $1 million
d) Products – completed operations aggregate: $3 million
e) Personal and advertising injury: $1 million
f) Umbrella coverage for personal injury and
property damage, including completed operations: $5 million
3) Automobile liability (including owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles): bodily
injury and property damage in the amount of $1 million per accident
4) Errors and Omissions (for any design or professional services)
Per Occurrence: $1 million
Aggregate (with 3 year tail if a claims made policy): $1 million
Add the following subsections:
§11.1.5 The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the life of the Agreement the above
stated insurance written by insurance carriers satisfactory to the Owner. The commercial
general liability and automobile liability coverages will insure the Owner for work
performed pursuant to this Agreement and will protect said Owner from and against all
claims arising out of the Agreement for injury to persons (including death) and/or
property of another, whether such operations be by the Contractor or any Subcontractor
or anyone directly employed or indirectly employed to the extent such claims arise out of
the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions.
11.1.6 It is a further condition of the Agreement that the Owner shall be named as an additional
insured, only for operations arising out of the performance of the Agreement, under the
following policies of insurance carried by the Contractor. (a) commercial general
liability, (b) automobile liability.
11.1.7 It is also understood and agreed on the part of the Contractor that the Agreement will
cover the Owner, its officers, agents, employees and servants against contingent liability
for any and all claims of any nature whatsoever arising out of said operations and covered
by the herein above policies of insurance.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -6
If the Contractor fails to procure and maintain such insurance, or if an aggregate policy
limit has been eroded, the contractor will notify the owner. The Owner shall have the
right to procure and maintain the required insurance for and in the name of the Contractor
and the Contractor shall pay the cost thereof and shall furnish all necessary information to
make effective and to maintain such insurance. If the Contractor fails to pay for the
insurance required herein, the Owner may pay the premiums and offset those amounts
against any amounts due under the Agreement to the Contractor.
11.1.8 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their
subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and any of
their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, for personal injury and property damage to the
extent covered by liability insurance and automobile insurance obtained pursuant to this
Section 11.1 or other liability insurance applicable to the Work. The Owner or
Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontracts, agents
and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreement, written where legally required
for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The
policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A
waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person
or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, and contractual or otherwise,
and did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly.
§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
Delete §§ 11.3.1 through and including § 11.3.1.5 and substitute the following:
The Owner shall procure and maintain at his own expense, until completion of direct
work and acceptance thereof, a builder’s risk insurance policy insuring against “all risks
of physical loss or damage” as the term is commonly construed in the insurance industry,
insuring the entire project against such physical loss or damage.
If other special insurance not provided for herein is desired by the Contractor, the Contractor shall
purchase such insurance at Contractor’s expense; such coverage to contain specific
limitations and exclusions. Faulty workmanship and negligence shall be excluded. A
copy of the policy shall be provided to the Contractor upon request.
Such insurance shall be written on forms acceptable to Owner in an amount not less than
the final completed value of the Project; less cost of site preparation (including fences
necessary to secure work area and excavation land, foundations below the lowest
basement floor, underground pipes and wiring, sidewalks, curbs and gutters; and shall
name as insured the Owner and Contractor. It shall be understood that subcontractors
and second level subcontractors are insured as to their interests in the partially completed
Project.
Any insured loss is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as
Trustee for the insured, as their interests may appear.
The insurance policy shall provide for necessary access to the Project by Owner as
follows: “Permission is hereby granted for the Owner to occupy such portion of the
premises completed or suitable for occupancy prior to final acceptance of the entire
project, any provision of the policy to the contrary notwithstanding.”
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -7
The Contractor and its subcontractors and suppliers waive all rights against the Owner for
damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by the builder’s risk
insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to the
work, except such rights they have to proceeds of such insurance provided by the Owner
on their behalf. The Contractor shall require similar waivers of its subcontractors and all
lower tier subcontractors, agents and employees. In waiving rights of recovery under
terms of this sub paragraph, the term “Owner” shall be deemed to include its employees,
and the architect/engineer and its employees as the Owner’s representative as provided in
the Contract Documents.
The Contractor, on his written request, shall be named jointly with the Owner in all
policies, all of which shall be open to its inspection.
The following are specific exclusions: This insurance does not cover pollution, land,
glass breakage, any tools owned by mechanics, any equipment, scaffolding, staging,
towers and forms owned or rented by the Contractor, the capital value of which is not
included in the cost of the work, or any temporary structures or trailers used by the
Contractor or any subcontractor or material supplier.
The Contractor shall pay any deductible amount up to _____________________ Dollars
($____________) when making a claim against the property insurance policy.
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner and its agents and employees
harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including attorney’s
fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such
claim, damage, loss, or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or
death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property including the work itself and
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any
negligent or intentional act or omission or breach of contract of the Contractor, any
subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for
whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by
a party indemnified hereunder. This specific indemnification by the Contractor is in
addition to and not in lieu of other remedies that may be available to the Owner.
§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
Delete §11.4.1 and substitute the following:
§11.4.1 As required by law, the Contractor shall furnish a Labor, Material and Performance
Bond, in the amount of 100% of the Contract Sum, to cover the faithful performance of
the Contract Documents and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Such bond
shall be executed and delivered to Owner promptly upon execution of the Guaranteed
Maximum Price Amendment. The bond shall be in the form and with a surety company
acceptable to the Owner. Premiums on such bond shall be paid by the Contractor. If, at
any time, a Surety of such bond becomes irresponsible or loses its right to do business in
the State of Colorado, the Owner may require another Surety acceptable to the Owner,
which the Contractor shall furnish within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice to
do so.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -8
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§13.1 GOVERNING LAW
Add the following:
Venue for any legal action or proceeding in connection herewith, including mediation or
arbitration, shall be exclusively in Mesa County, Colorado.
ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
Delete §§ 15.2.1 through and including § 15.2.8, and substitute the following.
§15.2.1 Any claim, dispute or other matter in question between the Contractor and the Owner
referred to the Architect, except those which have been waived as provided for in
subsections 15.1.6, 9.10.4 and 9.10.5, shall be subject to such remedies at law or equity
as may be available for the enforcement of contract rights pursuant to Colorado law.
However, no action shall be instituted on any such claim, dispute or other matter until the
earlier of (1) the date on which the Architect has rendered a written decision, or (2) the
10th day after the parties have presented their evidence to the Architect or have been
given a reasonable opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered his written
decision by that date. When such a written decision of the Architect states (1) that the
decision is final but subject to appeal as provided by law, and (2) that any claim must be
pursued by litigation or other means agreeable to the parties within 30 days after the date
on which the party making the claim receives the written decision, failure to assert such
claim within said 30-day period will result in the Architect's decision becoming final and
binding upon the Owner and the Contractor. The timely submission of a claim or dispute
or other matter in question between the Contractor and the Owner relating to the
execution and progress of the Work, pursuant to subsection 15.1.2, shall be a condition
precedent to the institution of any litigation or other dispute resolution proceeding.
§15.3 MEDIATION
Delete § 15.3.1 through and including § 15.3.3, and substitute the following:
§15.3.1 The parties may at any time agree to participate in nonbinding mediation to resolve any
dispute or claim arising under the Agreement not finally resolved between the Contractor
and the Owner pursuant to subsection 15.2.1 above.
§15.4 ARBITRATION/CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER
Delete §§ 15.4.1 through and including § 15.4.4.3, and substitute the following:
§15.4.1 ARBITRATION DELETED. All references to arbitration of disputes in the General
Conditions and in any other Contract Documents shall be deleted. Any arbitration
between the Owner and the Contractor submitted to arbitration shall be pursuant to a
written arbitration agreement executed after the dispute arises. Nothing contained herein
shall alter or affect the function of the Owner’s Representative in resolving disputes
between the Contractor and the Owner.
Add the following article:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -9
ARTICLE 16 GOVERNMENTAL ENTITY PROVISIONS
§ 16.1 APPROPRIATION OF FUNDS. Anything in the General or Supplementary Conditions
to the contrary notwithstanding, the Owner represents that a full and lawful appropriation
for the Project has been made and that the amount of money appropriated therefore is
equal to or in excess of the Agreement Sum. No change order or other form of order of
directive shall be issued by the Owner requiring additional compensable work to be
performed, which work causes the aggregate amount payable under this Agreement to
exceed the amount appropriated for the Agreement, unless the Owner gives written
assurance that a lawful appropriation to cover the costs of additional work have been
named or unless such work is covered under a remedy granting provision of the
Agreement. As used herein the term “remedy granting provision” means any agreement
clause which permits additional compensation in the event that a specific contingency or
event occurs.
§16.2 GOVERNMENTAL CODES/AGREEMENTS. All work performed under this
Agreement shall be subject to the requirements of any state or local codes having
jurisdiction at the site of the Work, and shall meet or exceed the requirements regarding
the Work set forth in any intergovernmental agreement now existing or subsequently
entered into between Owner and any town or local governmental entity. The Contractor
shall be aware of the Owner’s obligations under any such agreement and shall perform
the Work so as to comply with such obligations. The Contractor shall also be aware of
the provisions of sections 8-1-107(2)(d) and 22-32-124, C.R.S., which govern the
jurisdiction of state and local authorities with respect to building standards and the
application of local planning and zoning ordinances.
§16.2.1 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) and all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and
orders of all governmental agencies or authorities having jurisdiction to protect the safety
of employees and/or other persons who may be affected by the Work. The Contractor
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards to protect workers on the Project site
and the owners and users of adjacent property, and shall post danger signs and other
warnings against hazards created by the Work including but not limited to protruding
nails, hoists, well holes, elevator shafts, hatchways, scaffolding, window openings,
stairways, excavations, and falling materials. The Contractor shall designate a
responsible employee at the Project site as a safety officer to ensure the Contractor's
compliance with this section. Said employee shall be the Contractor’s Project
superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner.
§16.3 PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACT. The Contractor is informed and shall see that all
Subcontractors, material suppliers and workers on the Project are informed of the
following:
§16.3.1 The Owner is a public entity and the Project is a public works project within the intent
and meaning of section 38-26-105, C.R.S. Accordingly, all payments properly due to the
Contractor and all claims for amounts lawfully due from the Contractor and its
Subcontractors and all rights to mechanic’s liens to secure payment thereof arising on
behalf of any person, co-partnership, association of person, company or corporation that
has furnished or provided labor, materials, team hire, sustenance, provisions, provender,
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -10
or other supplies used or consumed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor in the
performance of the Work shall be subject to section 38-26-101, 105, 106, and 107, C.R.S.
§16.3.2 In the event any person, co-partnership, association of persons, company or corporation
that has furnished labor, materials, team hire, sustenance, provision, provender or other
supplies used or consumed by the Contractor or its Subcontractor in or about the
performance of the Work files a claim with the Owner by verified statement of the
amount due in the method an manner and in compliance with section 38-26-107(1),
C.R.S., then no amount of the Contract Sum shall be properly payable to the extent of
such claims until:
§16.3.2(a) such claim has been paid or withdrawn in the method, manner and in compliance
with section 38-26-107(2), C.R.S.; or
§16.3.2(b) one day following ninety (90) days after the date fixed for final settlement of
claims as published pursuant to section 38-26-107(2), C.R.S., provided no action
is commenced within such 90-day time period to enforce such unpaid claim in
the method and manner and in compliance with section 38-26-107(2), C.R.S.; or
§16.3.2(c) upon entry of final judgment in favor of the Contractor or a claimant to the extent
of such judgment, in the event within ninety (90) days after the date fixed for
final settlement of claims as published pursuant to section 38-26-107(2), C.R.S.,
an action is commenced to enforce such unpaid claim in the method and manner
and in compliance with section 38-26-107(2), C.R.S.
§16.4 NONDISCRIMINATION. The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as
follows:
§16.4.1 During the performance of the Contract Documents, the Contractor agrees not to
discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed,
color, sex, sexual orientation, marital status, national origin, disability or age, except
when sex or age is a bona fide occupational qualification. The Contractor will take action
to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during their
employment, without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, marital
status, national origin, disability or age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to
employment, promotion, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising;
layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for
training, including apprenticeship. The Construction Manager agrees to post in
conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices
setting forth the provisions of applicable Equal Employment Opportunity laws.
§16.4.2 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall state, in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by them or on their behalf, that all qualified applicants will receive
consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, sexual
orientation, marital status, national origin, disability or age.
§16.5 In compliance with section 8-17-101, C.R.S., et seq., Construction Manager shall give
preference to Colorado labor in the several classifications of skilled and common labor
employed to the perform the Work, and not less than eighty percent (80%) of each type
or class of labor in the several classifications of skilled and common labor employed on
the Project shall be Colorado labor. The term “Colorado labor” means any person who
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -11
has been a bona fide resident of the State of Colorado for a period of not less than one
year, without discrimination as to race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, marital
status, age, national origin or disability except when sex or age is a bona fide
occupational qualification. Contractor and all Subcontractors shall, in all respects,
comply with these Colorado labor requirements.
§16.6 PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY SECTION 8-17.5-102, C.R.S.
§16.6.1 The Contractor represents and warrants that, prior to executing the Agreement, it supplied
the Owner with a certification meeting the requirements of section 8-17.5-102(1), C.R.S.,
a copy of which is appended as Exhibit H thereto.
§16.6.2 During the term of this Agreement, the Contractor shall not –
§16.2.2(a) knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to perform any of the Work
under the Contract Documents.
§16.2.2(b) enter into a contract with a Subcontractor that fails to certify to Contractor that
that Subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal alien to
perform any of the Work under the Contract Documents.
§16.6.3 The Contractor warrants and represents that it has confirmed the employment eligibility
of all employees who are newly hired for employment to perform Work under the
Contract Documents through participation in either the e-verify program administered by
the Social Security Administration and Department of Homeland Security or the
employment verification program administered by the Colorado Department of Labor and
Employment (the “Programs”).
§16.6.4 During the term of this Agreement, the Contractor shall not use procedures of either of
the Programs to undertake preemployment screening of job applicants.
§16.6.5 If the Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a Subcontractor performing work under
this Agreement knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien, the Contractor
shall:
§16.6.5(a) Notify the Subcontractor and the Owner within three days that it has such
knowledge; and
§16.6.5(b) Terminate the contract with such Subcontractor if within three days of receiving
the notice required pursuant to subparagraph (a) of this section 16.6.5, the
Subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien;
except that the Contractor shall not terminate the contract with the Subcontractor
if during such three days the Subcontractor provides information to establish that
the Subcontractor has not knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal
alien.
§16.6.6 The Contractor shall comply with all reasonable request made by the Colorado
Department of Labor and Employment in the course of any investigation undertaken
pursuant to section 8-17.5-102(5), C.R.S.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 8000 -12
§16.6.7 Any other provision in this Agreement to the contrary notwithstanding, in the event the
Contractor violates any provision set forth in sub-subsection .2, .3, .4, .5 or .6 of this
Section 16.6, the Owner may terminate this agreement for breach and hold liable for
actual and consequential damages pursuant to section 8-17.5-102(3), C.R.S. Subsection
15.1.6 shall not apply to any claim for consequential damages under this subsection.
§16.7 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT PLAN. In the event Federal, state and local
regulations require Owner to follow a Stormwater Management Plan on any construction
project that will disturb at least one acre of soil, Contractor shall assure Owner is in
compliance with current State of Colorado Division of Water Quality's Stormwater
Regulations. The Owner will be consulted regarding project requirements prior to start of
construction. Personnel from Mesa County Government or the City of Grand Junction
will review and approve Stormwater Management Plans during the design phase of the
Project. Contractor understands that county or municipal personnel may perform site
inspections to insure compliance with stormwater regulation requirements.
END OF SECTION 00 8000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1
SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Project Identification: Aspen Ambulance District Facility
1. Project Location: Aspen, CO
B. Owner: Pitkin County
C. Architect: Chamberlin Architects, 437 Main Street, Grand Junction, CO 81501
D. The Work consists of the following:
1. The general construction of a 12,700 gsf, 2-story building. The Work includes, but is not
limited to site work, landscape, foundations, steel framing, CMU walls, steel studs walls,
brick veneer & pre-formed metal exterior walls, doors, windows, interior finish work,
equipment, plumbing, mechanical, and electrical.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 1000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALTERNATES 01 2300 - 1
SECTION 01 2300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if the
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternates into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
1.3 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work
of the alternate into Project.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
C. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections
referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Quartz Agglomerate Countertops
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALTERNATES 01 2300 - 2
1. Base Bid: Provide simulated stone countertops and backsplashes.
2. Alternate: Provide quartz agglomerate countertops and backsplashes.
END OF SECTION 01 2300
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 1
SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Requests for substitutions of materials exposed to view such as finishes, must have color
options closely matching colors indicated in the construction documents, as determined by the
Architect, in order to be considered.
C. All products intended to be provided under the “or equal” term are subject to the Substitution
Procedures.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or
unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not
required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to
Contractor or Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation is not
being, or cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 2
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated
results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform
compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.5 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved
substitutions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 3
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need
for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of
related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect
will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities
Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include
compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of
other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 2500
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 1
SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Coordination Drawings.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. Project meetings.
4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 2
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.
5. Progress meetings.
6. Preinstallation conferences.
7. Project closeout activities.
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
9. Project closeout activities.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b. Indicate required installation sequences.
c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit four (4) opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will
return two (2) copies.
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within fifteen (15) days of starting construction operations, submit a
list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at
Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 3
telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals
assigned to Project.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three (3)
days of the meeting.
B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days
after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient
location. The Architect will conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.
b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
e. Procedures for RFIs.
f. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
i. Submittal procedures.
j. Use of the premises (and existing building if applicable).
k. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 4
l. Construction waste management and recycling.
m. Parking availability.
n. First aid.
o. Progress cleaning.
p. Any other Agency agenda items.
3. Minutes: The Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. The Contract Documents.
b. Related RFIs.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Submittals.
e. Review of mockups.
f. Possible conflicts.
g. Compatibility problems.
h. Time schedules.
i. Weather limitations.
j. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
k. Warranty requirements.
l. Compatibility of materials.
m. Acceptability of substrates.
n. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
o. Testing and inspecting requirements.
p. Installation procedures.
q. Coordination with other work.
r. Protection of adjacent work.
s. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 5
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1) Sequence of operations.
2) Status of submittals.
3) Progress cleaning.
4) RFIs.
5) Status of proposal requests.
6) Pending changes.
7) Status of Change Orders.
3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor
will be returned with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and
the following:
1. Project name.
2. Date.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 6
3. Name of Contractor.
4. Name of Architect.
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
10. Contractor's signature.
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A or Contractor’s form with information listed above.
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as
indicated above.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00
p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the
RFI response.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 7
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B or Contractor’s form Including the following:
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 3100
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1
SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Provide Product Data for all products indicated in Construction Documents and as indicated in
individual product sections of the Specifications.
1. Provide Shop Drawings of all fabricated products and as indicated in individual product
sections of the Specifications.
B. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided upon
request by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. The Architect’s electronic file
waiver must be signed and returned prior to delivery of electronic files.
C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
b. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and
sequence submittals.
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 2
1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will
advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow twenty-one (21) days for initial review of each
submittal including:
a. Structural, Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical and Civil submittals.
E. Color Review and Approval: The Color Schedule in the Drawings indicate the initial color
selections for the project. Because of the potential for product substitutions and discontinuation
of colors, final color selections will be made by the Architect only after all color submittals
have been received from the Contractor.
1. Within seven (7) days after receipt of the final color submittal, the Architect will issue a
Final Color Schedule to the Contractor in the form of an ASI to modify the color
schedules in the Construction Documents.
F. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
f. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
G. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals
received from sources other than Contractor.
1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810, CSI Form 12.1A or Contractor’s standard
transmittal form.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 3
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related
submittal.
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Exceptions Taken” or “Make Corrections
Noted”.
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Exceptions Taken”
or “Make Corrections Noted” by Architect.
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1. The Architect’s electronic file waiver must be signed and returned prior to delivery of
electronic files.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project.
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
d. Standard color charts.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 4
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
g. Compliance with specified referenced standards.
h. Testing by recognized testing agency.
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
5. Number of Copies: Submit three (3) copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two (2) copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a. Dimensions.
b. Identification of products.
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.
d. Design calculations.
e. Compliance with specified standards.
f. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
g. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches.
3. Number of Copies: Submit three (3) opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are
required for Structural, Mechanical, Electrical or Plumbing Engineers, in which case
submit four (4) copies. Two (2) copies will be returned.
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a. Generic description of Sample.
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-
control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 5
4. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing
and inspection.
a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) sets of Samples. Architect will retain one (1)
Sample set and return one (1).
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to
be demonstrated.
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least two (2) sets of
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1. Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include
names of firms and personnel certified.
C. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
D. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
E. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 6
F. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
G. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
H. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Preparation of substrates.
2. Required substrate tolerances.
3. Sequence of installation or erection.
4. Required installation tolerances.
5. Required adjustments.
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
I. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative
making report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
J. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
K. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to
Architect.
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire
submittal for resubmittal.
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 7
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit
a written request for additional information to Architect.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit two (2) copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S/ ACTION
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1. No Exceptions Taken.
2. Make Corrections Noted.
3. Rejected.
4. Revise and Resubmit
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 8
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
F. Architect’s / Engineer’s (A/E) Responsibility:
1. The A/E will assume no responsibility for the correctness, dimensional accuracy or
completeness of submittals.
2. The A/E’s review will in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish
materials and products in compliance with the Contract Documents.
3. Unless deviations from the Contract Documents are clearly identified in the submittal, the
A/E’s review does not constitute an acceptance by the A/E.
END OF SECTION 01 3300
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-
assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 2
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
6. Complete test or inspection data.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 3
7. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
8. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
9. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
10. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
11. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
H. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 4
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will
perform same tasks for Project.
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
I. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
a. Mockup shall be approximately 48” x 48” and include a minimum of the following
components:
1) Masonry veneer and mortar
2) Siding
3) Aluminum window framing
4) Sealant between the materials above
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Mockup may be part of the building construction after approval.
1.6 TESTING SCHEDULE
A. Testing paid by Owner:
1. Fill and Backfill compaction density tests.
2. Concrete Testing.
3. Steel Testing.
B. Testing paid by Contractor:
1. Mechanical systems balancing and testing.
2. Electrical system testing.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 5
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to
perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities
having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 6
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency or special
inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as
the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 7
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 4000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 1
SECTION 01 4200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site
is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on
which Project is to be built.
1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 2
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate
and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960
www.aluminum.org
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333
www.aaadm.com
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202
www.aabchq.com
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664
www.aamanet.org
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
(202) 624-5800
www.transportation.org
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141
www.aatcc.org
ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888
www.airbarrier.org
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155
www.abma-dc.org
ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700
(American Concrete Institute)
www.aci-int.org
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216
www.concrete-pipe.org
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530
www.aeic.org
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878
www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000
www.aga.org
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118
www.agc.org
AHA American Hardboard Association
(Now part of CPA)
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 3
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955
www.aham.org
AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960
www.asphaltinstitute.org
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837
www.aia.org (202) 626-7300
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100
www.steel.org
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559
www.aitc-glulam.org
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America
(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700
www.alsc.org
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150
www.amca.org
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372
www.aosaseed.com
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989
www.archprecast.org
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600
www.apawood.org
APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood
Systems
(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000
www.api.org
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800
www.ari.org
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 4
www.asphaltroofing.org
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300
ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering
Institute
(See ASCE)
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-
Conditioning Engineers
(800) 527-4723
www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400
ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170
www.asme.org
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040
www.asse-plumbing.org
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)
www.astm.org
AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International)
www.awci.org
AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCSC)
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636
www.awinet.org
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205) 733-4077
www.awpa.com
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353
www.aws.org (305) 443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337
www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122
www.buildershardware.com
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010
www.bia.org
BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405
www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 5
BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association
International)
www.bifma.com
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772
www.bissc.org
CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880
www.carpetcushion.org
CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282
www.copper.org (212) 251-7200
CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263
www.canelect.ca
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700
www.cganet.com
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462
www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919
www.cisca.org
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137
www.cispi.org
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583
www.chainlinkinfo.org
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523
www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175
CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604
www.pbmdf.com
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607
CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846
www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200
www.crsi.org
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 6
CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727
(416) 747-4000
CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000
www.csa-international.org
CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744
www.caststone.org
CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900
www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700
www.cedarbureau.org
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)
www.cti.org
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010
www.dhi.org
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500
www.eia.org
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462
www.eima.com (770) 968-7945
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000
www.ejdc.org
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040
www.ejma.org
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937
www.esda.org
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00
(The International Basketball Federation)
www.fiba.com
FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35
(The International Volleyball Federation)
www.fivb.ch
FM Approvals FM Approvals (781) 762-4300
www.fmglobal.com
FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 7
www.fmglobal.com
FMRC Factory Mutual Research
(Now FM Global)
FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors
Association, Inc.
(407) 671-3772
www.floridaroof.com
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850
www.fluidsealing.com
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0
www.fsc.org
GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440
www.gypsum.org
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208
www.glasswebsite.com
GRI (Now GSI)
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400
www.greenseal.org
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440
www.geosynthetic-institute.org
HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744
www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200
www.gamanet.org
HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association
(Part of NAAMM)
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900
www.hpva.org
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550
www.hpwhite.com
IAS International Approval Services
(Now CSA International)
IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155
www.internationalbadminton.org
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 8
www.icea.net
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830
www.icri.org
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11
www.iec.ch
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900
www.ieee.org
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000
www.iesna.org
IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561
www.iest.org
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234
www.igcc.org
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510
www.igmaonline.org
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426
www.iliai.com
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11
www.iso.ch
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020
www.ansi.org
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732
www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150
ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (972) 238-5591
www.intertek.com
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int/home
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690
www.kcma.org
LMA Laminating Materials Association
(Now part of CPA)
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864
www.lightning.org
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 9
www.mbma.com
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138
www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610
www.metalframingmfg.org
MH Material Handling
(Now MHIA)
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815
www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222
www.marble-institute.com
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937
www.paintinfo.com
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings
Industry Inc.
(703) 281-6613
www.mss-hq.com
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405
www.naamm.org
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200
www.nace.org
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926
www.nadca.com
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,
ext. 453
www.aahperd.org/nagws/
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084
www.naima.org
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848
www.nbgqa.com
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222
www.ncaa.org
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900
www.ncma.org
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 10
www.ncpi.org
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550
www.ncta.com
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698
www.nebb.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110
www.necanet.org
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901
www.nelma.org
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200
www.nema.org
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382
www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900
www.nfhs.org
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555
(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000
www.nfpa.org
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776
www.nfrc.org
NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642
www.glass.org (703) 442-4890
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318
www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393
www.nlga.org
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)
www.nofma.com
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545
www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275
(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 11
www.nsf.org
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415
www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930
NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association
(Now TRI)
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association
(Now WDMA)
OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.
(Now ITS)
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300
www.pci.org
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322
www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956
www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929
http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu
PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522
(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of
America)
(703) 736-9666
www.landcarenetwork.org
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540
www.post-tensioning.org
RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections
www.boltcouncil.org
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580
www.rfci.com
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339
www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662
SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323
www.sae.org (724) 776-4841
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647
www.sdi.org
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 12
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010
www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424
www.sefalabs.com
SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil
Engineers
(See ASCE)
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234
www.sgcc.org
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075
www.siaonline.org
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association
(Now IGMA)
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995
www.steeljoist.org
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991
www.smacentral.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980
National Association
www.smacna.org
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100
www.smpte.org
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,
Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)
www.sprayfoam.org
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611
www.spib.org
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026
www.spri.org
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355
www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772
www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 13
www.steeltank.com
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333
www.steelwindows.com
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974
www.swrionline.org
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453
www.tileusa.com
TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries
Alliance
(703) 907-7700
www.tiaonline.org
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700
www.masonrysociety.org
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010
www.tpinst.org
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873
www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555
TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177
www.tileroofing.org
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577
www.ul.com (847) 272-8800
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902
www.uni-bell.org
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539
www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422
www.usgbc.org
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486
www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651
WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association
(Now WCSC)
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 14
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers
Association)
(212) 297-2109
www.windowcoverings.org
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door
Association)
(847) 299-5200
www.wdma.com
WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of
California)
(916) 372-9943
www.wicnet.org
WIC Woodwork Institute of California
(Now WI)
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889
www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333
www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930
www.wwpa.org
B. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed
to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CE Army Corps of Engineers
www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000
www.commerce.gov
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257
http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220
www.energy.gov
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167
www.epa.gov
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322
www.faa.gov
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 15
FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322
www.fcc.gov
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332
www.fda.gov
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111
www.gsa.gov
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112
www.hud.gov
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000
www.lbl.gov
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program
(See TRB)
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478
www.nist.gov
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742
www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999
PBS Public Building Service
(See GSA)
PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694
www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540
(See USDA)
SD State Department (202) 647-4000
www.state.gov
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934
http://gulliver.trb.org
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791
www.usda.gov
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000
www.usps.com
C. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 16
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-
2253
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-
0080
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
Available from Access Board
www.access-board.gov
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-
1800
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-
1800
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus
(See FS)
FED-STD Federal Standard
(See FS)
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
Available from Defense Standardization Program
www.dps.dla.mil
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-
8925
www.gsa.gov
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-
7800
www.wbdg.org/ccb
FTMS Federal Test Method Standard
(See FS)
MIL (See MILSPEC)
MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-
2664
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
REFERENCES 01 4200 - 17
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-
2253
Available from Access Board (202) 272-
0080
www.access-board.gov
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 4200
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
1.2 USE CHARGES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Owner, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for
construction personnel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 2
A. Pavement: Comply with pavement Sections.
B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch OD top and bottom rails.
Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.
C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry” or
“Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille
in system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 3
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
D. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1. Install electric power service either overhead or underground.
2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
F. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install at least one (1) telephone line(s) for each field office.
1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a. Police and fire departments.
b. Ambulance service.
c. Contractor's home office.
d. Architect's office.
3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
G. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
1. Provide DSL in primary field office if available.
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 4
A. General: Comply with the following:
1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas
adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location
as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within
construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.
1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and
paved areas.
2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas
according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material,
regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing.
4. Delay installation of final course of permanent hot-mix asphalt pavement until
immediately before Substantial Completion. Repair hot-mix asphalt base-course
pavement before installation of final course according to Division 32 Section "Asphalt
Paving."
C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.
D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel if there are no designated
areas of Owner's existing parking.
E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or
adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.
2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 5
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
C. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by
entrance gates.
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized
personnel.
3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 6
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 5000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1
SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not
considered new products.
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests and “or equal” submittals: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section “Substitution Procedures”.
B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable
product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt
of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Delivery and Handling:
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
3. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C. Storage:
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 3
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using appropriate form properly executed.
2. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
B. Product Selection Procedures:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 4
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
2. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
3. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
4. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
5. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product.
6. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.
7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in
Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the
other named manufacturers.
8. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"
Article for proposal of product.
9. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that
complies with other specified requirements.
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium
items.
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium
items.
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within sixty (60) days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at
discretion of Architect.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 5
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
5. Samples, if requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 6000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 1
SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. General installation of products.
4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
5. Cutting and patching.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
9. Correction of the Work.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 2
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a. Description of the Work.
b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
d. Recommended corrections.
2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 3
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on Project
site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 4
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 5
3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction forces.
1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule
for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on Owner's construction.
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not
to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 6
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration
into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching
and refinishing.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 7
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.11 CORRECTION OF THE WORK
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
EXECUTION 01 7300 - 8
A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 01 7300
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 1
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Disposing of non-hazardous demolition and construction waste.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification
program.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling
dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 2
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
END OF SECTION 01 7419
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 1
SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Warranties.
3. Final cleaning.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property
surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
8. Complete startup testing of systems.
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 2
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final
Completion.
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Preparation: Submit one (1) copy of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of
construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 3
1.5 WARRANTIES
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other
foreign substances.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 4
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.
k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
p. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01 7700
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 1
SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,
systems and equipment.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Final Submittal: Submit one (1) copy of each manual in final form at least seven (7) days
before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within fifteen (15) days after
final inspection.
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit one (1)
copy of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's
comments.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 2
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-
reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 3
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
2.2 OPERATION MANUALS
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
2. Operating procedures.
3. Wiring diagrams.
4. Control diagrams.
5. Piped system diagrams.
6. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B. Descriptions: Include the following:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4. Equipment function.
5. Operating characteristics.
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Startup procedures.
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.
4. Instructions on stopping.
5. Normal shutdown instructions.
6. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
7. Special operating instructions and procedures.
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 4
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1. Test and inspection instructions.
2. Troubleshooting guide.
3. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
4. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 5
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION
A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section
"Project Record Documents."
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 6
E. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 01 7823
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 1
SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1. Record Drawings.
2. Record Specifications.
3. Record Product Data.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1. Number of Copies: Submit one (1) set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one (1) set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect
will initial and date each print and mark whether general scope of changes,
additional information recorded, and quality of markups are acceptable and legible.
Architect will return prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final
submittal.
b. Final Submittal: Submit one (1) set(s) of original marked-up Record Prints, and
two (2) copies printed from Record Transparencies. Print each Drawing, whether
or not changes and additional information were recorded.
B. Record Specifications: Submit one (1) copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 2
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
c. Revisions to electrical circuitry.
d. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
e. Changes made following Architect's written orders.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop
Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting
an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly
prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for
formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
C. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
2. Record Transparencies: Organize into unbound sets matching Record Prints. Place
transparencies in durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of
each container with identification. If container does not include a complete set, identify
Drawings included.
3. Identification: As follows:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 3
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
d. Name of Architect.
e. Name of Contractor.
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
5. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 01 7839
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900 - 1
SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2. Demonstration and training video recordings.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of
instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and
outline for each training module.
1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of
each training module.
1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared
in same paper and PDF file format required for operation and maintenance manuals
specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating
maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for
this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful
learning performance.
B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction
time, and course content.
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
have been reviewed and approved by Architect.
1.6 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules
for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c. Operating standards.
d. Regulatory requirements.
e. Equipment function.
f. Operating characteristics.
g. Limiting conditions.
h. Performance curves.
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a. Emergency manuals.
b. Systems and equipment operation manuals.
c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
d. Product maintenance manuals.
e. Project Record Documents.
f. Identification systems.
g. Warranties and bonds.
h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b. Instructions on stopping.
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900 - 3
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a. Startup procedures.
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.
d. Regulation and control procedures.
e. Control sequences.
f. Safety procedures.
g. Instructions on stopping.
h. Normal shutdown instructions.
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.
5. Adjustments: Include the following:
a. Alignments.
b. Checking adjustments.
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a. Diagnostic instructions.
b. Test and inspection procedures.
7. Maintenance: Include the following:
a. Inspection procedures.
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d. Procedures for routine cleaning.
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.
g. Instruction on use of special tools.
8. Repairs: Include the following:
a. Diagnosis instructions.
b. Repair instructions.
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900 - 4
1.7 PREPARATION
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.
1.8 INSTRUCTION
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.
F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial
training use.
1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training
video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and
demonstrations, board diagrams, and other visual aids, but not student practice.
1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective
and lesson outline.
B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video in MPEG format, produced by
a digital camera with minimum sensor resolution of 12 megapixels and capable of recording in
full HD mode.
1. Submit video recordings on CD-ROM or thumb drive.
C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to
adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 7900 - 5
D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment
markings are clearly visible prior to recording.
E. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training
modules in same format as recordings of live training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 01 7900
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONSTRUCTION STAKING 02 2112 - 1
SECTION 02 2114 - CONSTRUCTION STAKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. This work consists of the construction surveying, calculating, layout and staking necessary for
the construction of all elements of the project. The work shall be done under the supervision of
a Registered Professional Engineer (P.E.) or Land Surveyor (L.S.) who is experienced and
competent in construction surveying and registered in the State of Colorado. The P.E. or L.S.
shall be available to review work, resolve problems, and make decisions in a timely manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish all personnel, materials, equipment, and traffic control necessary to
perform the required construction surveying and staking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR SURVEYING
A. The Contractor shall perform all construction surveying and staking that is necessary for
construction of the project. Construction surveying and staking shall be based on the survey
controls established by the project team surveyor and as noted on the plans. Construction work
shall not be performed until adequate lines and grades have been established by the Contractor.
The Engineer may require additional Contractor layout, staking, or surveying control as part of
the original bid if necessary to obtain acceptable completion of the original contract work.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
A. Roadway staking will include stakes for centerline, slopes, grades (blue tops), curb and gutter,
sidewalks, and islands. Grade stakes for finished subgrade will not be set until the grade
established by the slope stakes is constructed to within 0.3 foot of the finished subgrade
elevation. Major structures staking and references will be limited to centerlines, work lines, or
control lines, appropriate offset lines and grades, and elevations set for footings, foundations,
and finished floor elevations. Minor structures and retaining wall staking will be limited to
stakes establishing line and grade by using offset line and grade stakes. It will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to use these references and marks and establish any additional
control and layout necessary for the proper execution of the work in its final location. The
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONSTRUCTION STAKING 02 2112 - 2
Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of all the vertical and horizontal control it
transfers and establishes.
3.3 MAINTAINING STAKING
A. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and marks, and if any
are destroyed, disturbed or removed, the cost of replacing them will be borne by the Contractor.
Control points, bench marks, and other needed stakes that are damaged, destroyed, or made
inaccessible by the progress of construction shall be replaced, transferred, or re-established by
the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 CHANGES
A. All changes in lines and grades required by field conditions, and all discrepancies in grades,
alignment, location or dimensions detected by the Contractor shall be immediately brought to
the attention of the Engineer. No changes in given data or plans will be allowed unless
approved by the Engineer. All changes shall be documented in field survey notebooks.
3.5 RESPONSIBILITY AND CHECKING
A. Supervision and coordination of construction surveying and staking is the Contractor's
responsibility. The Engineer may check the Contractor's surveying and staking, however, such
checking will not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for accuracy or completeness of
work. All Contractor surveying and staking inaccuracies shall be corrected by the Contractor at
no cost. Engineer's checking or Contractor's corrections shall not entitle the Contractor to
additional cost or contract time extension.
3.6 SURVEY RECORDS
A. Field survey notes for construction surveying and staking shall be recorded by the Contractor in
survey notebooks. All survey records generated will be considered the property of the Owner
and shall be available for inspection or reproduction at anytime. All survey and staking
notebooks shall be transmitted to the Engineer for inclusion into the project records before final
project acceptance.
END OF SECTION 02 2112
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1
SECTION 03 3000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:
1. Footings.
2. Piles and Pile Caps.
3. Foundation Walls and Grade Beams.
4. Slabs-on-grade.
5. Composite slabs.
6. Building walls.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 017419 “Construction Waste Management” for recycling and disposal
requirements.
2. Section 099610 “Moisture Control Systems” for treatment of slabs to receive floor
coverings.
3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.
4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.
5. Division 32 Section "Decorative Concrete Paving" for decorative concrete pavement and
walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland Cement alone or in combination with one or more of the
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-
furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 2
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
2. Submit substantiating data for each concrete mix design contemplated for use to the
Architect/Engineer not less than four weeks prior to first concrete placement. Data for
each mix shall, as a minimum, include the following”:
a. Mix identification designation (unique for each mix submitted).
b. Statement of intended use for each mix.
c. Wet and dry unit weight.
d. Water/cementitious materials ratio.
e. Total air content.
f. Design slump.
g. Intended method of placement in field.
3. Shrinkage testing per ASTM C157.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,
and supports for concrete reinforcement.
1. Show all reinforcing, top and bottom profile of concrete element, supports below, and
concrete walls, grade beams, joists, etc. framing into the element.
2. Provide one continuous elevation at ¼” scale for all beams, joists, or walls in a common
line. Show pockets and openings in shear walls, structural slabs, beams, elevation at top
of beams, walls, columns, sections through all beams, pilasters and columns, and placing
sequence of reinforcing items with more than one reinforcing layer.
3. Show locations of approved construction joints, splices of reinforcing, type of splice used
and splice location, grade of all reinforcement used and specifically identify all ASTM
A706 and epoxy coated reinforcing.
D. Welding certificates if weldable reinforcement is specified on the Contract Documents.
E. Samples: For vapor retarder.
F. Qualification Data: For Installer testing agency.
G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating
compliance with requirements:
1. Alkali-Aggregate Reactivity of Aggregates. Submit test reports indicating that fine and
coarse aggregates are not “potentially reactive” based on the ASTM C295 or ASTM
C1260 (or ASTM C1293) testing limits set forth in Section 5.1 of “Guide Specification
for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association).
Alternately, submit ASTM C1567 test reports indicating that the combination of mix
ingredients reduces the expansion due to alkali-aggregate reactivity such that the mix
complies with Section 5.2 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica
Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). All tests for submitted reports shall
have been performed within one year of the submittal date.
H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1. Cementitious materials.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 3
2. Admixtures.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Fiber reinforcement.
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Bonding agents.
10. Adhesives.
11. Vapor retarders.
12. Semirigid joint filler.
13. Joint-filler strips.
14. Repair materials.
I. Minutes of pre-installation conference.
J. Placement notification: Advanced notification of concrete placement, submit notification at
least 24 hours in advance.
K. Proposed locations of saw cut joints not indicated on the Contract Documents.
L. Evaporative retarder product data and application data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as
ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified
Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and
equipment.
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete
Production Facilities."
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification program.
2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -
Grade II.
3. Concrete reinforcing steel shall be inspected by personnel experienced in concrete
construction and acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Personnel currently certified as an
ACI Concrete Construction Inspector will be accepted.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 4
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through
one source from a single manufacturer.
E. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding
Code--Reinforcing Steel."
F. Formwork: Design and engineering of formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Design of formwork and preparation of formwork drawings shall be under the supervision of a
professional engineer registered in the state of the Colorado.
G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
H. Mockups: Cast concrete slab-on-grade panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab-on-grade in the location indicated or, if not
indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
I. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section “Project Management and Coordination”.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor’s superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality
control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold and hot weather concreting procedures,
curing procedures, construction, contraction and isolation joints, joint filler strips, vapor
retarder installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement and concrete
protection.
3. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded, typed, and printed by the Contractor and
distributed by the Contractor to all parties concerned within 5 days of the meeting. One
copy of the minutes shall also be transmitted to the following for information purposes:
Owner’s Representative, Consultant Engineer. The minutes shall include a statement by
the concrete subcontractor indicating that the proposed mix design, and placing,
finishing, and curing procedures can produce the concrete quality required by these
specifications.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 5
J. Record of Work: Maintain a record listing the time and date of placement of all concrete for the
structure. Retain batch tickets for all concrete. Such record shall be kept until the completion
of the project and shall be available to the Architect for examination at any time.
K. Pre-placement Inspection: Formwork installation, reinforcing steel placement, and installation
of all items to be embedded or cast into concrete shall be verified by the Contractor prior to
placement.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement.
B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
2. Exterior grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS-1,
and as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge
sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form)), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic,
paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not
exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to
resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 6
D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally
sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.
E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.
F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
G. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
H. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of
concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) to the
plane of exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing
or waterproofing.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: Where welding of reinforcement is noted on the drawings
ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel
wire into flat sheets.
D. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut bars true
to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 7
C. Mechanical Splices: Full mechanical splices shall develop at least 125% of the bar yield
strength in tension or compression, as required. Splices shall comply with ICC-ES Evaluation
Criteria and shall comply with ACI 318 21.2.6.
2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source, throughout Project. Alternate cementitious materials, when proposed to control alkali-
silica reactions and tested as part of a representative complete concrete mix in accordance with
ASTM C1567, may be used subject to approval.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II sulfate resistant, gray white. Supplement
with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better, graded. All
coarse and fine aggregates shall be tested per ASTM C295 or ASTM C1260 (or ASTM C1293)
in accordance with Section 5.1 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica
Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). Provide aggregates from a single source with
documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications
and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As noted on the drawings.
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
2.6 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium
chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
7. Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture: The admixture shall conform to
ASTM C494, Type C or E, and shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in
municipal drinking water. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-
corrosive test data from an independent testing laboratory (of at least one year’s duration)
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 8
using an acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical
potential measures.
8. Mid-Range water reducing admixture: Shall be EUCON X-15 or EUCON MR by The
Euclid Chemical Company, DARACEM or Mira series by W.R. Grace, or POZZOLITH
997 or Rheobuild 3000 by Master Builders, and shall conform to ASTM C494 Type A.
C. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-
accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a
protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.
1. Available Products:
a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Catexol 1000CI.
b. Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN2.
c. Cortec Corporation; MCI 2000 .
d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S.
e. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete 222+.
f. Sika Corporation; FerroGard-901.
2.7 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of
fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Greenstreak
b. Williams Products, Inc.
2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb.
3. Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick), non-tapered.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class B. Include manufacturer's recommended
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.
1. Available Products:
a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra.
b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 10.
c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils.
B. Bituminous Vapor Retarder: 110-mil- (2.8-mm-) thick, semiflexible, 7-ply sheet membrane
consisting of reinforced core and carrier sheet with fortified asphalt layers, protective
weathercoating, and removable plastic release liner. Furnish manufacturer's accessories
including bonding asphalt, pointing mastics, and self-adhering joint tape.
1. Product: Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Premoulded Membrane Vapor Seal.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 9
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: 0.00 grains/h x sq. ft. x inches Hg (0.00 ng/Pa x s x sq. m);
ASTM E 154.
3. Tensile Strength: 140 lbf/in. (24.5 kN/m); ASTM E 154.
4. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf (400N); ASTM E 154.
C. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448,
Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a
No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
D. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-
mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing
No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine
aggregates.
2.9 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of
inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that
penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.
1. Available Products:
a. Burke by Edoco; Titan Hard.
b. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus.
c. ChemTec International; ChemTec One.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;
Intraseal.
e. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula.
f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard.
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard.
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard.
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard.
k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver.
l. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Duranox.
m. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Buff Hard.
n. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal.
o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS.
2.10 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application
to fresh concrete.
1. Available Products:
a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 10
b. Burke by Edoco; BurkeFilm.
c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film.
d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company;
Aquafilm.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film.
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar.
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid.
h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con.
j. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm.
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre.
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.
m. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm.
n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm.
o. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid.
p. Unitex; Pro-Film.
q. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Monofilm ER.
r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
C. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
D. Water: Potable.
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a
Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D 2240.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene.
D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing
and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit
requirements, and as follows:
1. Types I and II, non-load bearing , for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to
hardened concrete.
E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.0217-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized steel
sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 11
F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch (0.85 mm)
thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion
of concrete or debris.
2.12 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland Cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor
elevations.
1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic
cement as defined in ASTM C 219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended
by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4,100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
5. Provide products compatible with specified flooring materials and adhesives.
2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
Portland Cement in concrete as follows:
1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 12
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as
required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.
E. Performance and Design Requirements
1. Shrinkage: Shrinkage strain, determined and reported in accordance with ASTM C157 as
amended and modified herein, shall not exceed the values below for each class of
concrete listed.
a. Amendments and Modifications to ASTM C157:
1) Storage: After the initial 24 hour comparator reading, the specimens are
placed back in the lime-saturated water until the age of 7 days. At this time
another comparator reading is taken. This reading is used as the base
reading, which is used to calculate percent shrinkage. The specimens are
then stored in a 50% humidity room at 73 degrees.
2) Test Reports: Report gage length (average of 3) after 4, 7, 14, 28, and 56
days. In addition to the information required by ASTM C157 Section 11,
shrinkage test reports shall include the gage lengths (initial measurements)
used to determine the reported shrinkage strains.
b. 28-day Shrinkage Strain: Shrinkage strains, determined as above after 28 days of
storage, shall not exceed the following:
1) Concrete for slabs-on-grade cast directly on a vapor retarder: 0.046%.
2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Proportion structural normal weight concrete mixture as noted on the drawings, unless
aggregates are “potentially reactive” with alkalis based on the ASTM C295 or ASTM C1260 (or
ASTM C1293) testing limits of Section 5.1 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to
Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). When aggregates are
“potentially reactive”, compliance with Section 5.2 of “Guide Specification for Concrete
Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association) must be established
through ASTM C1567 testing for proposed alternate concrete mixture. Submit test reports in
accordance with Part I of this specification.
2.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
2.16 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 13
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure
can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Concrete adjacent to
elevators shall be installed within the tolerances required by the elevator manufacturer.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:
1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.
3. The permissible irregularity is a cumulative value due to all sources of error including,
but not limited to, layout, plumbness, member sizes, formwork offsets, joints, and
member levelness. The permissible irregularity shall also apply between adjacent
concrete surfaces on opposite sides of a construction joint, expansion joint, or shrinkage
pour strip.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous
locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 14
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and
other debris just before placing concrete.
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and
maintain proper alignment.
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
M. All formwork surfaces that will provide the finished surface of exposed concrete must be
accepted by the Architect before depositing concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and
Bridges" and with the following additional requirements:
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and
other conditions.
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day
design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without
loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply
new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete
surfaces unless approved by Architect.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 15
3.4 SHORES AND RESHORES
A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
shoring and reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.
B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to
distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will
induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and
provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.
3.5 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643
and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
2. Place plastic vapor retarder as indicated in the drawings.
3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that
would reduce bond to concrete.
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not place
reinforcement on grade or deck and subsequently raise into position while placing concrete. Do
not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated.
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with
wire.
F. Size, length, number, and placing of supports shall be sufficient to hold reinforcing in the proper
position within specified tolerances during construction traffic and concrete placement.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 16
G. On vertical formwork, use approved bar chairs or spacers as required to maintain proper
concrete cover and bar position. Do not staple or use any other metallic fastener to secure
bolsters, chairs, etc. to formwork for concrete surfaces exposed the exterior.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-
fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random contraction cracks.
3. All other Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, locate
construction joints on column centerlines. Locate control joints where shown on the
drawings. If not shown, provide control joints at column centerlines and at intervals not
more than 10 feet each way.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and
other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 17
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate
or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
F. Joints in Slabs on Metal Deck: Locate construction joints as noted on the drawings. For metal
deck slabs with W.W.F., continue W.W.F. through the construction joint and lap in the adjacent
pour. Do not provide control joints.
3.8 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed
waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated,
according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and
firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable.
3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect.
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to
limitations of ACI 301.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to
mixture.
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration
to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 18
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the
temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be
covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete as indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 19
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete
surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform
color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing
process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick
paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part Portland Cement to one and one-
half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
Portland Cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout will match
adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens,
rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part
Portland Cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water.
Add white Portland Cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color of dry grout
will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a
swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Polished Concrete: See section 033543 Polished Concrete Finishing
1. Use aggregate with multi colored rock, tans and grays
2. ½” size aggregate
3. Don’t use screen to push aggregate down to the bottom.
4. Power trowel to avoid air pockets, don’t over burn with power trowel, that can make it
hard to grind and polish.
5. For additional information or questions please contact
a. Dave.hoyt@ashfordformula.com
b. jim@retroplatesystem.com
D. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch (6 mm) in 1 direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings or to
receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.
E. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 20
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be
covered with fluid applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing.
F. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of
trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that
would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet,
ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish
coating system .
2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155
(ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-
grade.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for
suspended slabs.
G. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated or where
ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is
still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.
H. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish
with Architect before application.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated,
after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with
in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to
complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and
terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 21
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel-finish concrete
surfaces.
3.13 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the
remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped
at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover
material and waterproof tape. Moisture-retaining cover shall be inspected each day by
Contractor. Any areas which do not show condensation on the underside of the cover or
any slab areas which are not wet shall be immediately rewetted and the cover reapplied to
prevent moisture loss.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with
bonding of floor covering used on Project..
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 22
3. Curing Compound: Not allowed.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Not allowed.
3.14 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to
hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.15 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until
construction traffic has permanently ceased.
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact
faces of joint clean and dry.
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland Cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water
for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning and that are unacceptable to
the Architects. Allow Architect/Engineer to observe formed concrete surfaces immediately
upon removal of forms and prior to repair of surface defects. Defects in structural concrete
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer. Repair tie holes and surface defects
immediately after such observation. Where the concrete surface will be textured by sandblasting
or bush-hammering, repair surfaces before texturing.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in
depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 23
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. Submit proposed
repair for acceptance prior to beginning this work.
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of
width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level
surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and
patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's
approval.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 24
B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
C. Inspections:
1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and
slabs.
D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)
or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test
for each composite sample.
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mixture.
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each
composite sample.
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite
sample.
8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens
at 28 days.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 25
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.
9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-
cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.
10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain
Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of
concrete.
13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.
14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
E. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with
the Contract Documents.
F. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)
within 48 hours of finishing.
END OF SECTION 03 3000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 3543 - 1
SECTION 03 3543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Applying Sealer and Hardener, and polishing concrete to specified finish level.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of product requiring color selection.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s Certification:
1. Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is
certified applicator of special concrete finishes, and is familiar with proper procedures
and installation requirements required by the manufacturer.
B. Mock-ups:
1. Apply mock-ups of each type finish, to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, color
variation (if any), and standard of workmanship.
a. Build mock-ups approximately 50 square feet in the location, as directed by the
Architect or Owner Representative.
b. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed work if undisturbed at
time of substantial completion.
C. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section “
Project Management and Coordination”
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental limitations:
1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for substrate temperature and moisture
content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting
topping performance.
a. Concrete Floor Flatness rating recommended at least 40, where possible.
b. Concrete Floor Levelness rating recommended at least 30, where possible.
c. Concrete must be cured a minimum of 45 days or as directed by the manufacturer
before application of Retro Plate can begin.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 3543 - 2
d. Application of Retro-Plate shall take place 10 days prior to installation of
equipment and substantial completion, thus providing a complete, uninhibited
concrete slab for application.
B. Close areas to traffic during floor application and after application, for time period
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. HARDENING/SEALING AGENT
1. Retro-Plate 99, manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O. Box 50533, Provo,
Utah 84605, 801-812-3420.
a. Performance Criteria:
1) Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779 – Up to 400% increase in
abrasion resistance.
2) Impact Strength: ASTM C805 – Up to 21% increase impact strength.
3) Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 – No
adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray.
4) Reflectivity: Up to 30% increase in reflectivity.
2. Certified Applicators
3. Manufacturer’s Regional Representative
B. STAIN
1. AmeriPolish solvent-based dye, manufactured by Advanced Floor Products, Inc., P.O.
Box 50533, Provo, Utah 84605, 801-812-3420.
2. Color Sand.
2.2 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Neutralizing Agent:
1. Tri-sodium Phosphate
B. Water:
1. Potable
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 POLISHING
A. Polish: Level 3: Semi-Polished, 1500 grit.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 3543 - 3
B. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs per manufacturer’s written
instructions.
1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth. Expose
aggregate to a “Salt and Pepper” appearance.
2. Apply reactive stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and
according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time
between successive coats.
4. Apply penetrating stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to
match approved mockup.
6. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations.
7. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.
3.2 STAINING
A. Newly placed concrete shall be cured as directed by the manufacturer but not less than 14 days
before staining.
B. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Establish your grinding level starting point, then grind the floor up through the 400 grit
level prior to dye application.
2. Following the initial dye application, wait 30 minutes and wipe an area with a dry white
cloth to establish color acceptability.
3. Should your project require an additional dye application to achieve the desired color, do
not apply the second application less than 30 minutes following the first application.
4. If a second application is applied earlier than the required 30 minutes, the acetone will
reactivate the initial dye application and destabilize the applied color.
5. Multiple light applications are recommended; a single, heavy application is highly
discouraged.
6. A penetrating agent, to improve dye penetration and minimize both surface residue and
material waste, is required and available for purchase through Advanced Floor Products.
Adding this agent to the dye slows the drying time of the acetone, allowing for better
color penetration of the concrete.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING 03 3543 - 4
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect polished concrete floor against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
indicated.
1. Foot traffic only: Ram Board Floor Protection
2. Equipment and/or ongoing work: Ram Board Floor Protection with ½” plywood or 7/16”
OSB above.
END OF SECTION 03 3543
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 1
SECTION 04 2200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit
masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.
C. Samples: For each type and color of the following:
1. Decorative CMUs.
2. Pigmented mortar.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include data on
material properties.
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water
retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with
compressive strength requirement.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality
Requirements" for mockups.
1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes
approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) long by 48 inches (1200 mm) high by full thickness.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in
TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such
defects are exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces
of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,
bonding, and other special conditions.
B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Normal weight.
C. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.
1. Density Classification: Normal weight.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 3
D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive
strength of 1900 psi (13.1 MPa).
2. Density Classification: Medium weight.
3. Color: 600R by Basalite® Concrete Products LLC.
4. Texture: Split-face.
5. Pattern: See drawings.
2.3 CONCRETE AND MASONRY LINTELS
A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification;
and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not
less than that of CMUs.
B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs
with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels
before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-
weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar
color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing
no other ingredients.
D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record
of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Davis Colors.
b. Solomon Colors, Inc.
E. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated lime and
mortar pigments, all complying with specified requirements, and containing no other
ingredients.
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 4
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce
required mortar color.
G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry
mortar of composition indicated.
I. Water: Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60
(Grade 420).
B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that
comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel,
with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to
plane of wall.
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter,
hot-dip galvanized-steel wire.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-
dip galvanized-steel wire.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 5
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of
wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached
to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.187-inch- (4.76-mm-) diameter, hot-
dip galvanized-steel wire.
3. Corrugated-Metal Ties: Metal strips not less than 7/8 inch (22 mm) wide with
corrugations having a wavelength of 0.3 to 0.5 inch (7.6 to 12.7 mm) and an amplitude of
0.06 to 0.10 inch (1.5 to 2.5 mm) made from 0.060-inch- (1.52-mm-) thick steel sheet,
galvanized after fabrication with dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete.
D. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)
diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube
fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication.
E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm)
thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim" and as follows:
1. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into
wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself
for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining
sealant backer rod.
2. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer,
complying with ASTM D 4637/D 4637M, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall
Flashing.
2) Firestone Specialty Products; FlashGuard.
3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.
4) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Epra-Max EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 6
C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.
2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal
flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal
flashing with a sealant stop or flexible flashing with a metal sealant stop.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing.
D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products
or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other
and to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene
urethane or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying
with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant
polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm)
less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze Cell Vent.
2) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent.
3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; QV Quadro-Vent.
2. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full height and
width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe; in color
selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break Weep Mesh.
2) CavClear/Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Weep Vents.
3) Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net Weep Vents.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 7
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade
within the wall cavity.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break.
b. CavClear/Archovations, Inc.; CavClear Masonry Mat.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; Mortar Trap.
d. Mortar Net USA, Ltd; Mortar Net.
2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:
a. Strips, full depth of cavity and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with dovetail shaped
notches 7 inches (175 mm) deep that prevent clogging with mortar droppings.
b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick and 10 inches (250 mm) high, with
dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from
clogging with mortar.
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend
ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other
ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 8
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will
comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour
height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified.
Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12
mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4
inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6
m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet
(6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm
in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.
C. Joints:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 9
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8
inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at
other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.
E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.
F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where
cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar
to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than
paint) unless otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 10
3.5 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry-
veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and
masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor
design only uses one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and 24
inches (610 mm) o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. (0.2 sq.
m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at
intervals, not exceeding 8 inches (203 mm), around perimeter.
3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8
inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a
minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and
parapet walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel
or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide between masonry and structural
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other
rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36
inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 11
3.8 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on
sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into
masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and
turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to
top of metal drip edge.
4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing.
1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with
loose-fill insulation.
D. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration
requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of
reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened
sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them
during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough
strength to resist grout pressure.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 12
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified
requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-
prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades,
sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at seven days
and at 28 days.
3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar
fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes.
2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.
3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-
contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill
material as fill is placed.
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.
B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as
described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's
property.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 2200 - 13
END OF SECTION 04 2200
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2000 - 1
SECTION 05 2000 – STEEL JOIST FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. K-series and KCS-series steel joists.
2. Long-span steel joists.
3. Joist accessories.
4. Architecturally Exposed Joists and Joist Accessories
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. 03 3000—Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. 04 2200—Concrete Unit Masonry.
3. 05 1200 – Structural Steel Framing
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight
Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders."
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support
nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's
"Specifications."
C. Architecturally Exposed Joists and Joist Accessories: joists and joist accessories that is within
20 feet vertically and horizontally of a walking surface and is visible to a person standing on
that walking surface or is designated “Architecturally Exposed” in the Contract Documents.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live load deflections no greater than the
following:
1. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span.
2. Roof Joists supporting CMU/Brick veneer: Vertical deflection of 1/600 of the span.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2000 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacings of joists.
Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection
locations and details; and attachments to other construction.
1. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.
2. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for its preparation.
B. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying
with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications."
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for
designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.
B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are
applicable to types of joists indicated.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into cast-in-place concrete and masonry construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.
B. Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half preconsumer recycled content is not less than 80
percent.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2000 - 3
C. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
2.2 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
2.3 K-SERIES AND KCS-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web
Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord
members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord.
1. Joist Type: K-series and KCS-series steel joists.
B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel
Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle or -channel members.
C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
E. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
F. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
2.4 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-
Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle
top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as follows:
1. Joist Type: LH-series steel joists and DLH-series steel joists.
2. End Arrangement: Underslung.
3. Top-Chord Arrangement: Parallel or Pitched 1/4 inch per 12 inches, 2 ways, as indicated
on the Structural drawings.
B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.
D. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications."
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2000 - 4
E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of
welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
G. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joist girders.
H. Camber joist girders according to SJI's "Specifications."
I. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.
2.5 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of
material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing,
and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated.
C. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 5 Section "Metal
Fabrications."
D. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit
of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished
wall surface, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist
manufacturer to complete joist installation.
2.6 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Shop prime joists and joist accessories surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
4. Galvanized surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation for Architecturally Exposed Nongalvanized joists and joist accessories:
Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux
deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
C. Preparing Architecturally Exposed Galvanized joists and joist accessories for Shop Priming:
After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and
treat with etching cleaner.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2000 - 5
D. Priming Architecturally Exposed joists and joist accessories: Immediately after surface
preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate
recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use
priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats of shop
paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second
coat to distinguish it from first.
E. Surface Preparation for Nongalvanized Joists and Joist accessories (not architecturally
exposed): clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated
joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3.
F. Priming Joists and Joist Accessories (not architecturally exposed): Apply 1 coat of shop primer
to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1
mil thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine Architecturally Exposed Joists for twists, kinks, warping, gouges, and other
imperfections before erecting.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations,
and requirements in this Section.
1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece.
2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.
3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that
joists are stabilized during construction.
4. If possible, for Architecturally Exposed Joists, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary
bracing and safety cabling where they will be concealed from view in the completed
Work.
5. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead
loads have been applied.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 2000 - 6
C. Field welded joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding
sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting
welding work.
D. Bolted joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for
high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are
applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or
beams.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field
welds and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports.
B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C. High-strength, field-bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts."
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in
compliance with specified requirements.
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified
requirements.
3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting
structural steel, and accessories.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power-tool cleaning,
SSPC-SP 3.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
3.5 Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and
Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 2000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 1
SECTION 05 3100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Roof deck.
2. Form deck.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels,
pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck, signed by product manufacturer.
D. Welding certificates.
E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for
testing indicated.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel."
C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according
to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and
handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF DECK
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the
following:
1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33
(230) minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive
primer.
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33
minimum.
3. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Deck Profile: As indicated.
5. Design Uncoated Steel Thickness: As indicated.
6. Span Condition: As indicated.
7. Side Laps: Overlapped and fastened as indicated.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel
screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000
psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of
profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same
material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile recommended by SDI Publication
No. 30 for overhang and slab depth.
G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material,
finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory-
punched hole of 3/8-inch minimum diameter.
I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
J. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. When stud shear connectors are to be welded through metal deck to the top flange of beams. To
receive such studs beams shall be unpainted and free of debris prior to installation of the deck.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in
SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned
and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract
side-lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches
long, and as follows:
B.
1. Weld Diameter: 3/4” or 5/8 inch, nominal, as indicated on the plans.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds
per deck unit at each support. Space welds 6 inches apart, maximum.
C. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches, and as
follows:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 4
D.
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.
E. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
F.
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum.
G. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld
or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.
H.
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where
indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
complete closure.
3.4 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated on the structural drawings.
3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.
B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals indicated on the structural drawings, and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel
screws.
2. Mechanically clinch or button punch.
3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.
C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches (38 mm) , with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped or butted at Contractor's option.
D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of deck.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STEEL DECKING 05 3100 - 5
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field
tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
E. Verification of proper size, number, and location of stud shear connectors installed directly to
steel and through metal deck.
F. Weld testing of shear stud connectors installed through metal deck shall be tested as specified in
the Structural Steel section of these specifications.
G. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected work with specified requirements.
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 3100
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1
SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Shelf angles.
3. Metal ladders.
4. Elevator pit sump covers.
5. Miscellaneous steel trim.
6. Metal bollards.
7. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 2
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
G. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
H. Zinc-Coated Steel Wire Rope: ASTM A 741.
1. Wire-Rope Fittings: Hot-dip galvanized-steel connectors with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to minimum breaking strength of wire rope with which they
are used.
I. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: [1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert size>.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, [commercial steel, Type B]
[structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230)], with G90 (Z275) coating; [0.108-inch (2.8-
mm)] [0.079-inch (2-mm)] [0.064-inch (1.6-mm)] nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, [commercial steel, Type B]
[structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230)]; [0.0966-inch (2.5-mm)] [0.0677-inch (1.7-
mm)] [0.0528-inch (1.35-mm)] minimum thickness; [unfinished] [coated with rust-
inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel] [hot-dip galvanized after fabrication].
J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
K. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.
L. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
M. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
N. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).
O. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400
(leaded semired brass).
P. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel
bronze).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 3
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1
(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply
with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.
B. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments
that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and
compatible with topcoat.
C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 4
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-
weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20
MPa).
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally
welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and
24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent
construction.
C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of sizes
indicated.
1. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or punch holes
at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 5
D. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel
baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and
connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe
wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more
than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and
concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in-
place concrete.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased
edges.
3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.
6. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
2.9 ELEVATOR PIT SUMP COVERS
A. Fabricate from 3/16-inch (4.8-mm) abrasive-surface floor plate with four 1-inch- (25-mm-)
diameter holes for water drainage and for lifting.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed
field splices where possible.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 6
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with
other work.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
2.11 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.13 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.14 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 7
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill bollards solidly with concrete.
B. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes. Fill annular space around bollard
solidly with nonshrink grout.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 8
C. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
D. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack
grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 05 5000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL PAN STAIRS 05 5113 - 1
SECTION 05 5113 - METAL PAN STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition
to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,
whichever is less.
C. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
D. Welding certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL PAN STAIRS 05 5113 - 2
B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Stairs: Commercial class.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on
required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
B. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36 or steel strip, ASTM A 1011 or ASTM A 1018.
C. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510
D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, either commercial steel, Type B, or
structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.
2.3 ABRASIVE NOSINGS
A. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths necessary
to accurately fit openings or conditions.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL PAN STAIRS 05 5113 - 3
1. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above
aluminum extrusion.
2. Nosings: Two-piece units, 3 inches (75 mm) wide, with subchannel for casting into
concrete.
B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard
with manufacturer.
C. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary
for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated
installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL PAN STAIRS 05 5113 - 4
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)
screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep
holes where water may accumulate.
2.7 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers.
2. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
3. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed
for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from
steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than
0.067 inch.
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet.
2. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where they will be
concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.
3. Attach abrasive nosings to risers.
4. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with
reinforced concrete during fabrication.
5. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as
subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
2.8 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."
2.9 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL PAN STAIRS 05 5113 - 5
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary
for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and
masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section "Cast-
in-Place Concrete."
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on
tread width.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05 5113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 1
SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 2
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
2. Railing brackets.
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.
2. Fittings and brackets.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats
are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 STEEL AND IRON
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, square pattern, 2-inch (50-mm) woven-wire mesh,
made from 0.135-inch (3.5-mm) nominal diameter wire complying with ASTM A 510
(ASTM A 510M).
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide the following:
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard
fastening method for railings indicated.
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 4
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
D. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 09 Section
"High-Performance Coatings."
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of
approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 5
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
I. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. By flush bends.
J. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
K. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
M. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
N. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
O. Woven-Wire Mesh Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from woven-wire mesh crimped into 1-
by-1/2-by-1/8-inch (25-by-13-by-3-mm) metal channel frames. Make wire mesh and frames
from same metal as railings in which they are installed.
1. Orient wire mesh with wires horizontal and vertical.
P. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 6
2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or
masonry.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
E. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or
masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless primers specified in
Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.
F. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-
coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements
in SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at
spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or if not indicated as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 7
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or
other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
1. Coat, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, concealed surfaces of aluminum that are in
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2
inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 6 inches of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to metal supporting surfaces.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from
inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
B. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 8
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or
lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or
through concealed steel reinforcements.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 5213
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 1
SECTION 06 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood blocking and nailers.
2. Plywood backing panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)
thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless
otherwise indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 2
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawl
spaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant
progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame
front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time
during the test.
1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-
retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry
plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 3
C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
4. Cants.
5. Furring.
6. Grounds.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.
2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness
indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in
this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
manufacturer for material being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 1053 - 4
B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
G. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
END OF SECTION 06 1053
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1
SECTION 06 4116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
2. Closet and Utility Shelving.
3. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced
architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 12 3661.16 “Solid Surfacing Countertops”
2. Section 12 3661.19 “Quartz Agglomerated Countertops”
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative
laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, fire-retardant-treated materials, and, cabinet
hardware and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification
Program or meet quality standards of an AWI certified Fabricator and Installer.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including
installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. Grade: Custom.
C. Type of Construction: Frameless.
D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Nevamar
F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:
1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.
2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.
3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS.
4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
5. Edges: Grade HGS PVC tape, 3mm minimum thickness, color as selected from
manufacturer’s standard colors.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:
1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.
2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge
banding.
3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.
H. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and
drawers unless located directly under tops.
I. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. As scheduled on drawings.
2. Wood grain pattern shall be verticle.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with
requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 7111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive
Specification)."
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of
opening, self-closing.
1. Basis-of-Design:
a. Blum Clip Top 170 degree hinge with self-close, contractor’s option for Screw-on,
Press-in or Inserta type.
b. Blummotion soft close model # 973A6000.
C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
1. Basis-of-Design: Epco AS53-128-SS.
D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
E. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-
steel ball-bearing slides with self-close and soft-close.
F. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
1. Cypher lock where noted on elevations: Basis-of-Design Product: “Kitlock” KL100 by
Codelocks or approved equal.
G. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
1. Cypher lock where noted on elevations: Basis-of-Design Product: “Kitlock” KL100 by
Codelocks or approved equal.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4
H. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
J. SST Peg Rack Pullout for Pans and Utensils: Rev-a-shelf Reversing 434 Unit Hook and Peg.
Provide 10 standard hooks.
K. Adjustable Shelf Spice Pullout: Rev-a-shelf Wood Classics 432 series Filler Pullout
L. Trash and Recycling Pullout: Rev-a-shelf Double Bottom Mount White Wire Waste Container
M. File Rails: CompX Timberline File Frame Hanging file system kit or equivalent.
N. Standards and Brackets:
1. Knape and Vogt Standards and Brackets or equivalent.
a. Standard: 85 Series Standards, 60” 85WH60
b. Bracket: 185 Series Brackets, 12” and 24” 185WH12 and 185WH24
c. Shelf Rest: 106 ANO as needed
2.4 Shelving:
A. Closet and Utility Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.
1. Melamine-faced particleboard with applied PVC front edge.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, Fire-retardant-
treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
D. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,
and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at
cuts.
D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws
for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or
other variation from a straight line.
2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16
inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing
or metal framing behind wall finish or toggle bolts through metal backing or metal
framing behind wall finish as required.
END OF SECTION 06 4116
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WOOD TRIM 06 4600 - 1
SECTION 06 4600 - WOOD TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior standing and running trim.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless
concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
3. Shop finishing of wood trim.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, fire-retardant-treated
materials, and finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Lumber for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one
edge.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification
Program or meet quality standards of an AWI certified Fabricator and Installer.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations for Interior Work: Do not deliver or install interior wood trim until
building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other
requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WOOD TRIM 06 4600 - 2
1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including
installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Grade: Premium.
B. Wood Species and Cut:
1. Species: Select White Birch.
2. Cut: Plain Sawn.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard
for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content for Interior Materials: 4 to 9 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of wood trim and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with binder containing no
urea formaldehyde.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea
formaldehyde.
3. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive
containing no urea formaldehyde.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Interior Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports.
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.
Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-
metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
D. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
E. Adhesives: Use adhesives that meet the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before
fabrication.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WOOD TRIM 06 4600 - 3
B. Fabricate wood trim to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius
indicated for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.
D. Assemble casings in shop except where shipping limitations require field assembly.
2.6 SHOP PRIMING
A. Interior Wood Trim for Transparent Finish: Shop seal with stain (if required), other required
pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 09 9300 "Staining and Transparent
Finishing."
B. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood
trim, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in contact with
concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
2.7 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish wood trim at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final
touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at
fabrication shop as specified in this Section.
C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing wood
trim, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of wood trim. Apply two coats to end-grain surfaces.
D. Transparent Finish for Interior Trim:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish.
3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from
closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
5. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
WOOD TRIM 06 4600 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition wood trim to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install wood trim to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install wood trim level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install
level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
C. Scribe and cut wood trim to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
D. Anchor wood trim to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed
fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.
1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 36 inches (900 mm) long except where shorter single-length pieces are
necessary.
1. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).
END OF SECTION 06 4600
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1
SECTION 06 6400 - PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic sheet paneling. FRP
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels
complying with ASTM D 5319.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Crane Composites, Inc.
b. Marlite.
c. Nudo Products, Inc.
2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency
according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
3. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).
4. Surface Finish: Smooth.
5. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and
cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed
to conceal edges.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by
plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and
dust.
B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls
not less than half the width of full panels and so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than
12 inches (300 mm) wide.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim
in a bead of sealant.
D. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
E. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by
sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
END OF SECTION 06 6400
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 1113 - 1
SECTION 07 1113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of
application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed
spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. ChemMasters Corp.
2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products.
3. Gardner Gibson, Inc.
4. Henry Company.
5. Karnak Corporation.
6. Koppers Inc.
7. Malarkey Roofing Products.
8. Meadows, W. R., Inc.
9. Tamms Industries, Inc.
B. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 1113 - 2
C. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
D. VOC Content: 0.25 lb/gal. or less.
2.2 PROTECTION COURSE
A. Protection Course: Unless perimeter insulation or drain board is indicated on exterior face of
foundation, provide unfaced, fan-folded, extruded-polystyrene board insulation, nominal
thickness 1/4 inch with compressive strength of not less than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.
C. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering
and clogging weep holes and drains.
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.
C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other
imperfections; cover with asphalt-coated glass fabric.
3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07 1113 - 3
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve
coverages indicated.
B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces
building interior.
1. Apply from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a
minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing.
2. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces
exposed to view when Project is completed.
3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes
in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an
8-inch-wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing.
Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required.
4. Do not apply Dampproofing to foundation walls indicated to receive Waterproofing.
C. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe
of exterior masonry cavity walls.
1. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties,
and other items that penetrate inner wythe.
2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that
interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting
veneer.
3.4 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for
first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3
gal./100 sq. ft., or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft..
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE
A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply
with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection
course.
1. Support protection course with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by
protection board manufacturer over cured coating.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07 1113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1
SECTION 07 2100-THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
3. Mineral-wool blanket insulation.
4. Mineral-wool board insulation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do no expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to
Project site before installation time.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 2
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
d. Pactiv Building Products.
e. ACH Foam Technologies.
2. Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa).
3. Location: Vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces.
B. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or Class 2, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Rmax, Inc.
d. Firestone Building Products.
2. Location: Masonry wall cavity.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 3
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
B. Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTMC 665, Type II (non-reflective faced),
Class C (faced surface with a flame spread index of 25 or less), Category 1 (membrane is vapor
barrier).
1. Use where insulation height is over 96”.
C. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved
assembly.
2. Contractor’s option: May be used in lieu of sound attenuation blankets.
2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Johns Manville.
2. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL Inc.).
3. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning Company.
2.4 MINERAL-WOOL BOARD INSULATION
A. Mineral-Wool Board, Type III, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Type III; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of zero and zero, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing UL 723
for non-combustible combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 8 lb/cu. ft. (128 kg/cu. m).
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Johns Manville.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 4
2. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL Inc.).
3. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning Company.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier
materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without
damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 5
B. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior
grade line.
C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
D. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in from exterior
walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached,
spindle-type insulation anchors.
C. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610
mm) o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions.
Press units firmly against inside substrates.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall
ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or
protected from contact with insulation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 6
4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to
flanges of metal studs.
C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
END OF SECTION 07 2100
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
VAPOR RETARDERS 07 2600 - 1
SECTION 07 2600 – VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Below grade vapor retarders.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete, for slabs on grade.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Vapor Retarder: A material or system designed to impede the transmission of water vapor, with
a permeance rating not exceeding 1-perm (57.4 ng/(s∙m2∙Pa).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Vapor retarders under slabs-on-grade.
2. Vapor retarder tapes and accessories.
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency for insulation products.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of vapor retarder through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials with the fire-test-response characteristics
indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. VAPOR RETARDER-1: Polyolefin film-type product complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
VAPOR RETARDERS 07 2600 - 2
1. Products: One of the following:
a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 15.
b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vaporblock 15.
c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn 15-mil.
d. W.R. Meadows, Sealtight Perminator 15-mil.
e. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap 15-mil.
f. Insulation Solutions, Inc; Viper® II 15-mil.
2. Thickness: Minimum 15-mil.
3. Location: Under slabs-on-grade. Refer to drawings for vertical location.
B. Vapor Retarder Joint Tape: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint
tape, with a maximum perm rating of 0.3-perms.
C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
D. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
E. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDER
A. Vapor Retarder Under Slabs-on-Grade: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions related to membrane orientation and lapping
pattern.
2. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3. Coordinate installation of vapor retarder with penetrations. Seal around all penetrations
through membrane.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed above-grade vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07 2600
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 1
SECTION 07 2726 – FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes materials and installation of fluid applied air and moisture barrier membrane
over vertical above grade concrete walls, concrete masonry walls and wall sheathing.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s specifications, details and product data.
B. Manufacturer’s standard warranty.
C. Manufacturer’s ICC evaluation report confirming compliance with the IBC, IRC, and IECC as
an air barrier and water-resistive barrier.
D. Samples for approval as directed by architect or owner.
E. Show drawings: substrate joints, cracks, flashing transitions, penetrations, corners, terminations,
and tie-ins with adjoining construction, and interfaces with separate materials that form part of
the air barrier assembly.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer’s name and
identification of product.
B. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing temperatures and temperatures in excess of 90
degrees F (32 degrees C). Store away from direct sunlight.
C. Protect Portland cement based materials (bag products) from moisture and humidity. Store
under cover off the ground in a dry location.
D. Protect and store accessory and auxiliary products in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.
1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) during application
and drying period, minimum 24 hours after application of air and moisture barrier materials.
B. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C)
or if surface temperature is likely to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 2
C. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of materials.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sto Corp. or approved equal.
B. Obtain primary air barrier and accessory air barrier materials from a single source.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Primary Air Barrier Material: StoGuard with Sto Gold Coat – ready-mixed flexible spray or
rolled applied air and moisture barrier material.
B. Accessory Materials:
1. Sheathing Joint Treatments:
a. Sto RapidGuard™: one component STPE rapid drying gun-applied treatment for
sheathing joints, rough openings, seams, cracks, penetrations and other transitions
in above grade wall construction.
2. Rough Opening Treatments:
a. Sto RapidGuard™: one component STPE rapid drying gun-applied treatment for
sheathing joints, rough openings, seams, cracks, penetrations and other transitions
in above grade wall construction.
3. Transition Detail Components:
a. Sto RapidGuard™: one component STPE rapid drying gun-applied treatment for
sheathing joints, rough openings, seams, cracks, penetrations and other transitions
in above grade wall construction.
4. Primers
a. StoGuard Primer: rubber resin emulsion primer for use with StoGuard Tape to
enhance adhesion.
C. Auxiliary Materials
1. Wet sealant: Dow Corning 758, 790, 791, and 795 sealants.
2. Pre-cured sealant tape: Dow 123.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 3
3. Spray adhesive: 3M Super 77 Spray Adhesive.
4. Spray foam: Dow Great Stuff for Gaps and Cracks.
D. Patching and Leveling Material for Concrete and Masonry
1. Sto Leveler: polymer modified cementitious patch and leveling material for prepared
concrete and masonry surfaces up to 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Sto BTS Xtra: polymer modified lightweight cementitious patch and leveling material
for prepared concrete and masonry surfaces up to 1/8 inch (3 mm).
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Durability, resistance to aging, water and water penetration resistance, structural loading: joint
treatment and primary air barrier material, comply with ICC ES AC 212
B. Flexibility: ASTM D 522, primary air barrier material, no cracking or delamination before and
after aging using 1/8 inch (3 mm) mandrel at 14º F (10º C)
C. Nail seal ability: ASTM D 1970, 7.9.1, primary air barrier passes
D. Resistance to mold: ASTM D 3273, no mold growth after 28 day exposure
E. Adhesion: joint treatment and primary air barrier material, ASTM C 297 or D 4541, > 30 psi
(207 kPa), or exceeds strength of glass mat facing on glass mat gypsum substrates
F. Surface burning: ASTM E 84, joint treatment and primary air barrier material flame spread <
25, smoke developed < 450, Class A building material
G. Water vapor permeance: ASTM E 96 Method B, > 10 perms (570 ng/Pa∙s∙m2)
H. Field adhesion testing: ASTM D 4541, > 30 psi (207 kPA) or exceeds strength of glass mat
facing on glass mat gypsum substrates
I. Fire resistance: ASTM E 119, permitted for use in exterior walls of fire-resistance-rated
construction assemblies. Refer to ICC-ESR 1233.
J. Building envelope air leakage: ASTM E 779 or 1827, < 0.4 cfm/ft2 (2 L/s·m2)
K. Material air leakage: ASTM E 2178, primary air barrier and joint treatment < 0.004 cfm/ft2 at
1.57 psf (0.02 L/s•m2 at 75 Pa)
L. Assembly air leakage: ASTM E 2357, < 0.04 cfm/ft2 (0.2 L/s·m2) air leakage after conditioning
protocol
M. Fire propagation: NFPA 285, meets requirements for use on all Types of construction. Refer to
ICC-ESR 1233.
N. Volatile Organic Compounds: SCAQMD Rule 1113, joint treatment and primary air barrier
material < 100 g/L
O. Water-resistive barrier: ICC ES 212, joint treatment and primary air barrier material comply
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 4
and are listed in a valid ICC ESR.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspect concrete and concrete masonry surfaces for:
1. Contamination – algae, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease, mildew or other
foreign substances.
2. Surface deficiencies – weak, friable, chalkiness, laitance, bugholes, and spalls.
3. Cracks – measure crack width and record location of cracks.
4. Damage or deterioration.
5. Moisture content and moisture damage – use a moisture meter to determine if the surface
is dry enough to receive the waterproof air barrier and record any areas of moisture
damage or excess moisture.
6. Flush masonry mortar joints completely filled with mortar.
B. Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement:
1. Exterior Grade and Exposure I wood based sheathing: E30U-2007, Engineered Wood
Construction Guide, and the requirements of the applicable building code.
2. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing in compliance with ASTM C 1177: consult
manufacturer’s published recommendations and ICC ES Report. Conform with project
requirements for wind load resistance.
C. Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that might
adversely affect the air and moisture barrier installation. Do not start work until deviations are
corrected.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Concrete Masonry
1. Surface must be structurally sound and free of weak or damaged surface conditions such
as laitance or spalls. Surface must be clean, dry, frost-free, and free of any bond
inhibiting materials such as dust, dirt, oil, algae, mildew, salts, efflorescence, or any other
surface contamination. Mortar joints must be struck flush with the surface.
2. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, lintels and shelf angles.
3. Remove loose or damaged material by water-blasting, sandblasting or mechanical wire
brushing. Remove surface contamination such as dirt or efflorescence by chemical or
mechanical means. Repair surface defects such as spalls, voids and holes with Sto BTS
Xtra (up to 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick) or Sto Leveler (up to 1/4 inch [6 mm] thick).
4. Repair non-structural cracks up to 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by raking with a sharp tool to
remove loose, friable material and blow clean with oil-free compressed air. Apply joint
treatment material over crack, embed reinforcement (where applicable), and smooth joint
treatment material with a trowel, drywall or putty knife to cover the reinforcement.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 5
B. Concrete
1. Surface must be structurally sound and free of weak or damaged surface conditions such
as laitance, bugholes, or spalls. Surface must be clean, dry, frost-free, and free of any
bond-inhibiting materials such as dust, dirt, oil, form release, algae, mildew, salts,
efflorescence, or any other surface contamination.
2. Remove projecting fins, ridges, form ties, and high spots by mechanical means.
3. Remove loose or damaged material by water-blasting, sandblasting or mechanical wire
brushing. Remove form release by chemical or mechanical means. Repair surface defects
such as honeycombs, pitting, spalls, voids or holes with Sto BTS Xtra (up to 1/8 inch [3
mm] thick) or Sto Leveler (up to 1/4 inch [6 mm] thick).
4. Repair non-structural cracks up to 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide by raking with a sharp tool to
remove loose, friable material and blow clean with oil-free compressed air. Apply joint
treatment material over crack, embed reinforcement (where applicable), and smooth joint
treatment material with a trowel, drywall or putty knife to cover the reinforcement.
C. Sheathing
1. Remove and replace damaged sheathing.
2. Spot surface defects such as over-driven fasteners, knot holes, or other voids in sheathing
with knife grade joint treatment material.
3. Spot fasteners with knife grade or coating joint treatment material.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades to ensure air barrier continuity with connections at
foundation, floor lines, flashings, lintels and shelf angles, openings and penetrations such as
pipes, vents, windows and doors, masonry anchors, rafters or beams, joints in construction,
projections such as decks and balconies, and roof line.
B. Transition Detailing: detail transition areas with Sto RapidGuard or StoGuard Transition
Membrane to achieve air barrier continuity. For illustrations of installation, refer to Sto Guide
Details and Sto RapidGuard Installation Guide or StoGuard Transition Membrane Installation
Guide (www.stocorp.com).
C. Rough opening protection
1. Install rough opening protection. Refer to Sto details and applicable Sto product bulletins.
D. Sheathing joints
1. Install joint treatment material over sheathing joints. Refer to Sto details and applicable
Sto product bulletins.
E. Air and moisture barrier coating
1. Concrete – install one coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray or roller in a uniform, continuous
film of 10 wet mils to the prepared concrete substrate. Do not install over working or
moving joint sealants.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 6
2. Concrete Masonry – install one liberal coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray or roller in a
uniform, continuous film to the prepared concrete masonry substrate. Backroll spray
applications. Allow to dry. Install a second liberal coat in a uniform, continuous film, and
backroll spray applications, to achieve a void and pinhole free surface. Depending on the
condition of the surface a minimum of 10 wet mils up to a maximum of 30 wet mils per
coat is required. Apply additional coats if needed to achieve a void and pinhole free
surface. Do not install over working or moving joint sealants.
3. Sheathing
a. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing: install one coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray or
roller in a uniform, continuous film of 10 wet mils to the prepared glass mat
gypsum substrate to achieve a void and pinhole free surface. Do not install over
working or moving joint sealants.
b. Plywood sheathing: install one coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray or roller in a
uniform, continuous film of 10 wet mils to the prepared substrate to achieve a void
and pinhole free surface. Do not install over working or moving joint sealants.
c. OSB sheathing: install one coat of Sto Gold Coat by spray or roller in a uniform,
continuous film of 10 wet mils to the prepared substrate and allow to dry. Install a
second coat in a uniform, continuous film of 10 wet mils to achieve a void and
pinhole free surface. Do not install over working or moving joint sealants.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner’s qualified testing agency or building envelope consultant shall perform inspections and
tests.
B. Inspections: air barrier materials are subject to inspection to verify compliance with
requirements.
1. Condition of substrates and substrate preparation.
2. Installation of primary air barrier material, accessory materials, and compatible auxiliary
materials over structurally sound substrates and in conformance with architectural design
details, contractor’s shop drawings, project mock-up, and manufacturer’s written
installation instructions.
3. Air barrier continuity and connections without gaps and holes at foundation, floor lines,
flashings, lintels and shelf angles, openings and penetrations such as pipes, vents,
windows and doors, masonry anchors, rafters or beams, joints in construction, projections
such as decks and balconies, and roof line.
C. Tests: air barrier materials and assembly are subject to tests to verify compliance with
performance requirements:
1. Qualitative air leakage test: ASTM E 1186
2. Quantitative air leakage test: ASTM E 779, E 783, and E 1827
3. Adhesion test: ASTM D 4541
4. Qualitative adhesion and compatibility testing: wet sealant manufacturer’s field quality
control adhesion test
D. Repair non-conforming substrates and air barrier material installation to conform with project
requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUID APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 7
E. Take corrective action to repair and replace, reinstall, seal openings, gaps, or other sources of
air leakage to conform with project performance requirements.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect air barrier materials from damage during construction caused by wind, rain, freezing,
continuous high humidity, or prolonged exposure to sun light.
B. Protect air barrier materials from damage from trades, vandals, and water infiltration during
construction.
C. Repair damaged materials to meet project specification requirements.
D. Clean spills, stains, soiling from finishes or other construction materials that will be exposed in
the completed work with compatible cleaners.
E. Remove all masking materials after work is completed.
END OF SECTION 07 2500
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07 4110 - 1
07 4110 - PREFORMED METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preformed metal panel work as shown on the drawings, of fully supported type and types
which are capable of structurally spanning between support girts.
2. Include the associated trim and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's specifications, standard detail drawings and installation instructions
for preformed metal panels. Include manufacturer's certification or other data
substantiating that the materials and finishes comply with the requirements.
B. Samples:
1. Submit twelve (12) inch long by full-width samples of each type of preformed metal
panel, complete with factory-applied finish. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for
pattern, texture and color only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engage an Installer for the erection of preformed metal panels who is either the panel
manufacturer or an experience erection firm licensed by or acceptable to the panel manufacturer.
B. Field Measurements: Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to completion of shop
fabrication and finishing of preformed metal panels. Do not delay job progress; allow for
trimming where final dimensions cannot be established before fabrication.
C. Design system to provide movement of components without causing buckling, failure of joint
seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effect, when subject to seasonal temperature
ranges.
D. Design system to accommodate tolerances of structure, provided irregularities do not exceed
them and clearances are maintained.
E. SMACNA Details: Except as otherwise indicated or recommended by panel manufacturer,
comply with applicable recommendations and details of the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
by SMACNA.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Handle, store and protect metal panels in a manner which will prevent damage to units, finishes
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07 4110 - 2
or strippable coating (if any). Protect against weathering and moisture and prevent penetration of
water into stacked panels.
B. Comply with panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer
1. Submit written 20 year standard finish warranty, providing for non-prorated material and
replacement cost. Warrant panels by the manufacturer for 20 years against rupture and
perforation.
B. Installer
1. Provide written warranty for two (2) years from the date of final completion and
acceptance, covering materials and workmanship for watertightness, and leaks. During
the two year period, Installer shall repair all leaks without any cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL PANEL, TYPE 1
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PAC-CLAD®
Reveal Flush Panel (12-inch nominal) prefinished concealed fastener metal wall panel by
Peterson Aluminum Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AEP Span; a BlueScope Steel company.
2. Architectural Building Components.
3. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
4. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
5. Fabral.
6. Firestone Building Products.
7. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
8. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
B. Color: Medium Bronze.
2.2 WALL PANEL, TYPE 2
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PAC-CLAD® Flush
Panel (7-inch nominal) prefinished concealed fastener metal wall panel by Peterson Aluminum
Corporation or comparable product by one of the following:
1. AEP Span; a BlueScope Steel company.
2. Architectural Building Components.
3. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
4. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
5. Fabral.
6. Firestone Building Products.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07 4110 - 3
7. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, LLC.
8. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
B. Color: Midnight Bronze.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Exposed Metal
1. Steel, Zinc Coated: ASTM A361; or A446, Grade A, except higher strength grade if
needed to comply with performance requirements; with ASTM A525,G90 hot-dip zinc
coating, followed by ASTM D2092, surface preparation for applied coatings, Method A
except where panel manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating
durability.
2. Use gauges required to meet span and load conditions but not less than 24 gauge.
B. Miscellaneous Materials
1. Refer to other sections for structural support systems or substrates shown to receive
preformed metal panels.
C. Assembly and Installation Accessories
1. Provide manufacturer's standard fasteners, brackets, clips, anchoring devices, furring
strips, spacers, flashing, closures, adhesives, joint sealers, expansion joints and other
components needed for a complete, permanently weatherproof installation. Use materials
which are non-corrosive, non-deteriorating and compatible with the panel faces.
D. Trim
1. Provide trim components, if any, indicated as part of the preformed metal panel work,
including terminations, wall angles, fascias, corner units, seam covers and similar
components of the work. Except as otherwise indicated, match the material and finish of
the exterior panels.
2.4 METAL PANEL COATINGS
A. General
1. Pre-finish (coil coat) exposed metal sheets to the greatest extent possible prior to forming
and panel fabrication.
2. Protective Coating: Immediately upon completion of the metal panel finish, apply a
transparent, color-coded, strippable-film coating, not less than 1.0 mills dry film thickness,
suitable for protection of the finish through completion from the surface at that time.
B. Fluorocarbon Coating
1. Full-strength 70% "KYNAR 500" (Pennwalt Corp. resin), consisting of proper cleaning,
pretreatment and conversion coating; followed by epoxy-resin baked-on prime coat,
followed by fluorocarbon coating bake 15 minutes at 450oF to produce a finish coat not
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07 4110 - 4
less than 0.8 mills thick.
C. Concealed Steel Coating
1. On inside faces of steel panels, provide panel manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive
coating. After proper cleaning, pretreatment and conversion coating, apply one coat of
rust-inhibitive metal primer and one coat of metal enamel, 1.0 mills dry film thickness.
2.5 PANEL FABRICATION
A. General
1. Comply with the dimensions, profile limitations, gauges and fabrication details shown
and, to the extent not shown, provide manufacturer's standard product fabrication.
2. Prefabricate and preassemble the panels, trim and accessories to the greatest extent
possible at the factory, so that field erection and assembly work will be minimized.
B. Finishing
1. Apply the specified finishes in accordance with manufacturer's standards, and in
accordance with the coating manufacturer's instructions.
2. Color: As scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Comply with panel manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and erection of
preformed soffits.
2. Anchor component parts of the preformed soffit systems securely in place, providing for
necessary thermal and structural movement.
B. Erection
1. Install panels, trim, and fasteners so that they are plumb, level, and straight.
2. Install caulking in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to provide a weather
tight installation.
3. Field cutting of panels and trim shall be done in a workmanlike manner and as shown on
drawings.
C. Metal Separation
1. Apply a coat of bituminous paint, concealed, on one or both surfaces wherever dissimilar
metals would otherwise be in contact. Use gasketed fasteners where needed to eliminate
the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action between metals.
D. Tolerances
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07 4110 - 5
1. Erect the work plumb, level and true to line with tolerances not exceeding 1/4 inch in runs
of 20 feet, and within 0.125 inch offset of adjoining panel faces and alignment of
matching profiles.
E. Fasteners
1. Provide a concealed fastener installation system, with no fasteners exposed on either the
exterior or interior faces of the work for soffit panels.
F. Sealants
1. Install gaskets and sealants for the preformed metal panel work as indicated and as
required for performance. Comply with sealant manufacturer's instructions for installation
and curing.
2. Refer to Section 07 9200 for sealants between the panel work and adjoining work.
G. Damaged Material
1. Remove and replace panels and component parts of the work which have been damaged
(including finish) beyond successful repair, as directed by the Architect. Repair minor
damage.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning
1. Clean exposed surface (exterior and interior) of preformed metal panel work promptly
after completion of installation, including removal of strippable coating (if any). Comply
with recommendations of both the panel and coating manufacturer.
B. Protection
1. The Installer of preformed metal panel shall advise the Contractor in writing of protection
and surveillance procedures which can be foreseen as needed to ensure that the work will
be without damage or deterioration at the time of final acceptance of other construction
work.
END OF SECTION 07 4110
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 1
SECTION 07 5423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.
2. Roof insulation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.
B. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 2
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments
to other work.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Sheet roofing, of color required.
2. Aggregate surfacing material in gradation and color required.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored
liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated
shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent
deflection of deck.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 3
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, fasteners,
roofing accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
2. Firestone Building Products.
3. GAF Materials Corporation.
4. GenFlex Roofing Systems.
5. Johns Manville.
6. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.
7. Versico Incorporated.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested
according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.
A. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-60.
2. Hail Resistance: SH.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 4
B. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
2.3 TPO ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform,
flexible TPO sheet.
1.Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
2.Exposed Face Color: Gray.
2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm)
thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers,
preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings,
T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.5 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane
roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 3, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 5
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for
intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-
resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof
insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and
that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.
3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with
requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 6
A. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does
not restrict flow of water.
E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch
(6 mm) with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
F. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
G. Loosely Laid Insulation: For ballasted roofing loosely lay insulation units over substrate.
3.4 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of
roofing.
D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and
perimeter of roofing.
E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and
sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 7
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.
G. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with
clamping ring.
3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 07 5423 - 8
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 5423
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1
SECTION 07 6200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured Products:
a. Manufactured through-wall flashing and counterflashing.
2. Formed Products:
a. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
b. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
c. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B. Fabricate and install copings capable of resisting the following forces according to
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:
1. Wind Zone 1: For velocity pressures of 21 to 30 lbf/sq. ft. (1.00 to 1.44 kPa): 60-lbf/sq.
ft. (2.87-kPa) perimeter uplift force, 90-lbf/sq. ft. (4.31-kPa) corner uplift force, and 30-
lbf/sq. ft. (1.44-kPa) outward force
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements
from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each
manufactured product and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between
shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in
Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and
dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.
5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of
expansion and contraction.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and
counterflashings as applicable.
7. Details of special conditions.
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below:
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam
and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed
accessories.
3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.
E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance
manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials
away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Copper Sheet: ASTM B 370, cold-rolled copper sheet, H00 temper, of
minimum uncoated weight (thickness) indicated; coated on both sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50
percent zinc, 50 percent tin).
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Surface: Smooth, flat.
3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
4. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry
film thickness of 0.5 mil.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 4
and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured
item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze or
Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Solder:
1. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Copper: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.
2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to
greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 5
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not
allowed on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant.
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant
concealed within joints.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less
than thickness of metal being secured.
G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and
other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as
gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than
twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter
accessories from same metal as gutters.
1. Accessories: Continuous, removable leaf screen with sheet metal frame and hardware
cloth screen.
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 6
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered
elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop
fabricate elbows.
1. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
2.5 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal,
and solder or weld watertight.
1. Coping Profile: as detailed.
2. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch- wide, concealed backup plate.
3. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick.
B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
C. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
D. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.
2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not
exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated.
Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of
wall openings. Form with 2-inch- high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate
from the following materials:
1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Copper: 16 oz./sq. ft..
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 7
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend
4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end dams.
Fabricate from the same material as flashing.
1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend
tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and
tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 8
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than
1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at
temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned
surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.
2. Pre-tinning is not required for zinc-tin alloy-coated copper.
3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinated installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach
gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal
watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, [50 feet
(15.24 m)] apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 9
2. Install continuous gutter screens on gutters with noncorrosive fasteners, removable for
cleaning gutters.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate
hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between.
2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24-inch
centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at
24-inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 24-inch centers.
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install
stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches
and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36-inch
centers.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes
that penetrate roof.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 10
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04
Section "Stone Masonry."
C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a
clean condition during construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 6200
06/08/2018
1301.01 – GROWTH FUND OFFICE BUILDING PHASE II BP#1
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 7200 - 1
SECTION 07 7200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Snow guards.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Components:
1. Snow guard system consists of snow guard bracket and base plate with (2) stainless steel
nuts and (2) bonded stainless steel and EPDM washers.
2. Tubing (snow fence).
3. Couplings.
4. End Caps.
5. End Collars.
6. Ice Flags.
7. Fasteners:
a. To be of metal compatible with snow guards.
b. Fasteners strength shall be equal to or exceed that of the snow guard system.
8. Flashing Patch of appropriate size, material and method of installation to meet roof
manufacturer’s requirement for proper flashing.
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1. Spacing to be recommended by manufacturer.
2. Install a minimum of 7 fasteners per snow guard base plate.
3. Design to withstand retained snow loads.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer’s specifications, standard detail drawings, installation instructions and
recommended layout.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer to be experienced in the installation of specified roofing material and snow guards for
not less than 5 years in the area of the project.
06/08/2018
1301.01 – GROWTH FUND OFFICE BUILDING PHASE II BP#1
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 7200 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY / STORAGE / HANDLING
A. Inspect material upon delivery and order replacements for any missing or defective items. Keep
material dry, covered and off the ground until installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Alpine SnowGuards. A division of Vermont Slate & Copper Services, Inc. 289 Harrel St.
Morrisville, VT 05661, (888) 766-4273, www.alpinesnowguards.com
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Snow Guard Bracket: 6000 series aluminum.
B. Base Plate: 11 gage 304 stainless steel with two 5/16” 304 stainless steel machine screws
welded into countersinks.
C. Tubing: 6000 Series Aluminum, extruded.
1. Diameter: 1” O.D.
2. Wall Thickness: 0.120”.
D. Couplings: 6000 Series Aluminum.
1. Internal and concealed couplings 3” long.
2. External and exposed couplings which can also serve as an expansion mechanism 5”
long.
E. End Caps: 304 Stainless Steel.
F. End Collars: 6000 Series Aluminum.
G. Ice Flags: 6000 Series Aluminum.
H. Fasteners: Compatible with chosen roof application and meet specified pull out values as
shown in load test data.
2.3 FINISH
A. Mill Finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Substrate:
06/08/2018
1301.01 – GROWTH FUND OFFICE BUILDING PHASE II BP#1
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07 7200 - 3
1. Inspect structure on which snow guard system is to be installed and verify that it will
withstand any additional loading that it may incur. Notify general contract of any
deficiencies prior to installation.
2. Verify roofing has been installed correctly prior to installation of snow guards.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for location of system.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions for installation and layout.
END OF SECTION 07 7200
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified
testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping
system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration
firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment
or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having
jurisdiction prior to submittal.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article.
Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified
testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other
gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration
firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming
openings, and with penetrating items if any.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. A/D Fire Protection Systems, Inc.
c. Construction Solutions.
d. Grabber Construction Products.
e. Hilti, Inc.
f. Passive Fire Protection Partners.
g. STC Architectural Products.
h. Tremco, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water
leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per
UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa).
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening
at and no more than 50-cfm (0.024-cu. m/s) cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. (9.3
sq. m) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less
than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting
agency for conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of
firestopping.
D. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with
the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering
not less than 3 inches (76 mm) high and with minimum 0.375-inch (9.5-mm) strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet (4.57 m) from
end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet (9.14 m).
B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or
plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm)
of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove
penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels
with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed.
Include the following information on labels:
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to
ASTM E 2174.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed
because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with
requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
END OF SECTION 078413
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
3. Urethane joint sealants.
4. Immersible joint sealants.
5. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
6. Latex joint sealants.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>
C. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.
D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Preconstruction laboratory test reports.
C. Preconstruction field-adhesion-test reports.
D. Field-adhesion-test reports.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2
E. Sample warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing
indicated.
1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated
below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific
joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint
sealants to joint substrates.
2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in
contact with glazing and gasket materials.
3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact
with [stone] [masonry] <Insert substrate> substrates.
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to
Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [Two] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or
replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: [Five] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants and primers.>
1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for sealants.>
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
B. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
C. Silicone, S, NS, 35, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent
movement capability. nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
D. Silicone, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
E. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
F. Silicone, S, NS, 50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
G. Silicone, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
H. Silicone, S, P, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 100 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
I. Silicone, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
J. Silicone, M, P, 100/50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 100 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
C. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent
and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
D. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, neutral-curing
silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
E. Silicone, Nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent
and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and
minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5
B. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
C. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
D. Urethane, S, P, 35, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 35 percent and minus 35 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade P, Class 35, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
E. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
F. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class 50, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
G. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
H. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
I. Urethane, M, NS, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
J. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent
movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
K. Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 Urethane,
M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement
capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P,
Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
2.5 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C 1247, [Class 1] [Class
2]; tested in deionized water unless otherwise indicated
B. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 100/50, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 100
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
C. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 35, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 35 percent
and minus 35 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Use NT and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
D. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 50
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
E. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 35, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 35
percent and minus 35 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 35, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
F. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 25, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag, plus 25
percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
G. Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, pourable, plus 50
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7
H. Urethane, Immersible, S, P, 25, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, pourable, plus 25
percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
I. Urethane, Immersible, M, NS, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
J. Urethane, Immersible, M, NS, 25, T, NT, I: Immersible, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25
percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
K. Urethane, Immersible, M, P, 25, T, NT, I: Immersible, multicomponent, pourable, plus 25
percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, NT, and I.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
2.6 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide
to prevent mold and mildew growth.
B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,
nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing
silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
C. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, [Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin)] [Type O (open-cell material)] [Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)] [ or
any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint
application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8
B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation
instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 9
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing
begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling
agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or
adjacent surfaces.
1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform [10] <Insert number> tests for the first [1000 feet (300 m)] <Insert
dimension> of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each [1000 feet (300 m)] <Insert dimension> of joint length
thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated
requirements.
3.4 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.
b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.
d. Joints in stone paving units[, including steps].
e. Tile control and expansion joints.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. <Insert other joints>.
h. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT] <Insert joint sealant>.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 10
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water
immersion[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints in pedestrian plazas.
b. Joints in swimming pool decks.
c. <Insert other joints>.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Urethane, immersible, S, P, 25, T, NT, I] <Insert joint sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
e. <Insert other joints>.
f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT] <Insert joint sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.
d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
e. <Insert other joints>.
f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT] <Insert joint sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 11
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of [unit masonry] [concrete] [walls] [and]
[partitions].
d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete [beams] [and] [planks].
e. <Insert other joints>.
f. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT] <Insert joint sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces
not subject to significant movement[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of [interior doors]
[windows] [and] [elevator entrances].
c. <Insert other joints>.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Acrylic latex] <Insert joint sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces[ <JS-#>].
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. <Insert other joints>.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT] <Insert joint
sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
H. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics[ <JS-#>].
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 12
1. Joint Locations:
a. Aluminum thresholds.
b. Sill plates.
c. <Insert other joints>.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: [Butyl-rubber based] <Insert joint sealant>.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match
Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors] <Insert color>.
END OF SECTION 079200
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 9219 - 1
SECTION 07 9219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.
B. Samples: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required.
C. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint sealants that do
not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish acoustical joint sealants to
repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 9219 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing
representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical
sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:
a. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials, Inc.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Pecora Corporation.
d. Tremo Incorporated.
e. USG Corporation.
2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.
C. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials.
D. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint
sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant
manufacturer.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 9219 - 3
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more
stringent requirements apply.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint
sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with
ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off
sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of
floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.
C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of
acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings
before they are installed.
END OF SECTION 07 9219
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Custom hollow metal doors and frames.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.
B. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-
HMMA 861.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door design.
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3 by 5
inches (75 by 125 mm).
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision
of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or
UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.
D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit
and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood
blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air
circulation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
fabrication.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Mesker Door Inc.
5. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
6. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable
for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating
designation; mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.
G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting
of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. (96- to 192-kg/cu. m)
density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 4
J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil
(0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of
asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.3 CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors not less than 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm) thick, of seamless hollow
construction unless otherwise indicated. Construct doors with smooth surfaces without visible
joints or seams on exposed faces. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
B. Exterior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum 0.053 inch
(1.3 mm) thick.
C. Interior Door Face Sheets: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum 0.042 inch (1.0
mm) thick.
D. Core Construction: Provide thermal-resistance-rated cores for exterior doors.
1. Steel-Stiffened Core: 0.026-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, steel vertical stiffeners of same
material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more
than 6 inches (152 mm) apart, spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches (127
mm) o.c. Spaces filled between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation.
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.
b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with
thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 6.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu
(1.057 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
E. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
F. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm)
radius.
G. Top and Bottom Channels: Closed with continuous channels, minimum 0.053 inch (1.3 mm)
thick, of same material as face sheets and spot welded to both face sheets.
H. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 with
reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.
2.4 CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Fabricate frames of construction indicated. Close contact edges of corner joints tight
with faces mitered and stops butted or mitered. Continuously weld faces and soffits and finish
faces smooth. Comply with ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.
1. Door Frames for Openings 48 Inches (1219 mm) Wide or Less: Fabricated from 0.053-
inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
2. Door Frames for Openings More Than 48 Inches (1219 mm) Wide: Fabricated from
0.067-inch- (1.7-mm-) thick steel sheet.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 5
3. Sidelight and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent
door frame.
4. Borrowed-Light Frames: Fabricated from 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.
B. Exterior Frames: Formed from metallic-coated steel sheet.
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861 with
reinforcing plates from same material as frame.
E. Head Reinforcement: Provide minimum 0.093-inch- (2.3-mm-) thick, steel channel or angle
stiffener for opening widths more than 48 inches (1219 mm).
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-
(9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick,
and as follows:
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from
same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.
B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16
mm) high unless otherwise indicated.
C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from
same material as frames in which they are installed.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 6
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.
B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.
C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project
site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/NAAMM-
HMMA 861.
C. Hollow Metal Doors:
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.
3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19
mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth,
flush, and invisible.
2. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot
welds per anchor.
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 7
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and
mounted in metal-stud partitions.
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.
d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm)
o.c.
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as
follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or
hot-rolled steel sheet.
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/NAAMM-
HMMA 861.
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door
hardware.
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series
specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.
4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with
Division 26 Sections.
G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow
metal work.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 8
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.
5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and
type of installation indicated.
2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line
from head to floor.
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 9
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
HMMA 840.
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim
as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor,
and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take
precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged
by grout forces.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead
structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to
other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for
securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to
frame jamb members.
9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 10
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm) plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4
inch (19 mm).
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with
hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1
SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
2. Factory finishing flush wood doors.
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 8000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.
2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Undercuts.
5. Requirements for veneer matching.
6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's
Quality Certification Program or is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited
certification body.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eggers Industries.
2. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.
3. VT Industries, Inc.
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification or WI Certified Compliance Labels indicating that
doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do
not contain urea formaldehyde.
C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty.
D. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating
indicated.
2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer
stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent
seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
E. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control,
based on testing according to UL 1784.
F. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2, made with binder containing
no urea-formaldehyde.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
3. Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for
doors indicated to receive exit devices.
G. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 3100 N (700 lbf).
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 1780 N (400 lbf).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3
2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
2. Species: Select White Birch.
3. Cut: Plain Sawn.
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
7. Core: Particleboard.
8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive
planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
2.4 LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-
veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in
doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required
for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of same wood species as door, and profile
as selected from manufacturer’s sticking options.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
END OF SECTION 08 1416
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 1
SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Access doors and frames for gypsum board walls and ceilings where indicated on
drawings, or if not indicated, where required for access to valves or where regular
maintenance is required.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details,
fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including
types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following
test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames.
2. UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which
may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule
specified in "Submittals" Article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 2
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.
B. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond.
Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-
SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.
C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch (0.76-mm) zinc-coated steel sheet formed
to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Acudor Products, Inc.
2. Jensen Industries.
3. J. L. Industries, Inc.
4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
5. Milcor Inc.
B. Recessed Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal, 5/8 inch recessed pan to accept drywall.
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange.
4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type.
5. Latch: Self-latching bolt operated by flush key with interior release.
C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Medium-Security, Flush Access Doors with Trimless Frames: Fabricated
from steel sheet.
1. Locations: Wall surfaces.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of 2-inch-thick, mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet
metal with a minimum thickness of 0.075 inch.
5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
6. Hinges: Concealed-pin type.
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
8. Lock: Self-latching device with detention lock.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 3
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports
indicated.
1. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely
attached to perimeter of frames.
2. For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-
coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.
3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels
aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08 3113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1
SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and
approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show
evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified
without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components.
B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads.
1. Design Wind Load: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Testing: According to ASTM E 330 or DASMA 108 for garage doors and complying
with the acceptance criteria of DASMA 108.
C. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY
A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to
DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Raynor;
TC200 or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than
10,000.
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. (0.406 L/s per sq. m) at 15 and 25 mph (24.1
and 40.2 km/h) when tested according to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105.
D. Installed R-Value: 10.25 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.
E. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
1. Section Thickness: 2 inches (51 mm).
2. Exterior-Face Surface: Embossed stucco tecture.
3. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
F. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track.
G. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and
sensor edge.
H. Windows: Approximately 34 inches by 16 inches (864 mm by 406 mm), with square corners,
and spaced apart the approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; in three row(s) at height
indicated on Drawings; installed with insulated glazing of clear float glass.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 3
I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly and chain lock keeper.
1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from outside with
cylinder.
J. Electric Door Operator:
1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per
day.
2. Operator Type: Jackshaft, side mounted.
3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or
industrial use; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8
feet (2.4 m) or lower.
4. Motor Exposure: Interior, clean, and dry.
5. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.
6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor; self-monitoring type.
7. Control Station: Interior-side mounted.
8. Other Equipment: Audible and visual signals, Portable, radio-control system.
K. Door Finish: Exterior skin to have two coats of paint, one primer coat and one finish coat.
1. ArmorBriteTM Powder-Coat finish.
a. Color: As selected by Architect.
2.3 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS
A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel
(CS) sheet.
1. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or
tongue-in-groove weather-resistant seal, with a reinforcing flange return.
2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction,
separating the exterior and interior faces of door.
B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles
formed from galvanized-steel sheet welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed
from galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles not
more than 48 inches (1219 mm) apart.
C. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen
door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed to
depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.
D. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
2.4 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized
for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings,
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 4
Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support
of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading.
1. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track without
sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of
track spaced 2 inches (51 mm) apart for door-drop safety device.
B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type, size, and in arrangement indicated.
Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or
other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.
B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile,
according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door
sections through stiles and rails.
C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with
varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide 3-inch- (76-mm-) diameter roller tires for 3-
inch- (76-mm-) wide track and 2-inch- (51-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch- (51-mm-)
wide track.
2.6 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded deadbolt, operating
handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.
1. Lock Cylinders: Cylinders specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware" and keyed to
building keying system.
B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
C. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage
power supply when door is locked.
2.7 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs
fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion
shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles
indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 5
B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on
torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance
mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft.
C. Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables.
D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to
bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either
lifting cable breaks.
E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the
wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.
F. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening
operation.
2.8 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by
door manufacturer for door and "operation cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor
and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake,
clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories
required for proper operation.
1. Comply with NFPA 70.
2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6; with
NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.
B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than
number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.
C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains,
and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification.
D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure
indicated.
1. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Phase: Single phase.
b. Volts: 115V.
c. Hertz: 60.
2. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate,
and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec.
(203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate
ratings or service factor.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 6
E. Obstruction Detection Device: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic
safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately
stops and reverses downward door travel.
1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in
door opening without contact between door and obstruction.
a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to
detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature
is activated, door closes only with sustained pressure on close button.
F. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-
button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure, push-button
control labeled "Close."
1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-
purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
G. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip electrically powered door with capability for emergency
manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not
exceed 35 lbf (155 N).
H. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect
mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency
manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount
mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent
motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
I. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch
adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.
J. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with
regulatory requirements for accessibility.
K. Portable, Radio-Control System: Consisting of two of the following:
1. Three-channel universal coaxial receiver to open, close, and stop door.
2. Portable control device to open and stop door may be momentary-contact type; control to
close door shall be sustained- or constant-pressure type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and
as specified.
B. Tracks: Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid
installation of track and door-operating equipment.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 7
C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in
compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
D. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.
E. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion.
F. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded
galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.
END OF SECTION 083613
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 1
SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior storefront framing.
2. Storefront framing for window walls.
3. Storefront framing for punched openings.
4. Operable windows for storefront framing.
5. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
3. Failure includes the following:
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Sealant failure.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Deflection of Framing Members:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to
glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 2
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm),
whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2
mm), whichever is smaller.
D. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-
pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
2. Entrance Doors:
a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a
static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 L/s per sq. m) at a
static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).
E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.
G. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
H. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas
having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according
to AAMA 1503.
I. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas
having the following sound-transmission characteristics:
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 35 STC when tested for laboratory sound
transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.
2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): Minimum 30 OITC when tested for
laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E
1332.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-
framed systems.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types,
functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
D. Other Action Submittals:
1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door
hardware.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 4
D. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
b. Deterioration of metals, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
c. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
d. Failure of operating components.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Entrance Door Hardware:
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and
removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer North
America, TrifabTM VG 451T Framing System or comparable product by one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 5
2. Tubelite.
3. YKK AP America Inc.
B. Sight Line: 2 inches.
C. System Depth: 4-1/2 inches.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front at exterior locations; Center at interior locations.
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
3. Provide concealed fasteners. If exposed fasteners are necessary use fasteners with
countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system.
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
manufacturer for joint type.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 6
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded,
of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.5 OPERABLE WINDOWS FOR STOREFRONT FRAMING
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer North
America; GLASSvent™ Windows (Outswing Casement) for Storefront Framing.
B. Hardware: Provide manufacturer’s standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless
steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly
operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to accommodate sash
weight and dimensions.
1. Outswing Casement Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:
a. Stainless Steel 4-Bar Hinges.
b. Cast White Bronze Cam Locking Handles.
C. Accessories:
1. Optional Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frames, 6063-T6 alloy and temper, joined
at corners: 18 x 16 mesh fiberglass screen cloth; frames finished to match aluminum
windows; splines shall be extruded vinyl, removable to permit rescreening.
2.6 EXTERIOR ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer
North America; 500 Tuffline Entrances.
2. Door Construction: 2-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.1875-inch thick, extruded-
aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing
brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie
rods.
3. Door Design: 5-inch vertical stile, 5-inch top and 10-inch bottom rail.
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
(255 mm) above floor or ground plane.
4. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 7
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
C. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear-block system or screw-
spline system.
D. Operable Windows for Storefront Framing: Include a complete system for assembling
components and anchoring windows.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install
three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames
for pairs of doors.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable
strip and mortised into door edge.
2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 8
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to
Shop Drawings.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Dark Bronze Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08 4113 - 9
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce
weathertight installation.
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet;
1/4 inch over total length.
2. Alignment:
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating window sashes, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact
points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate
hardware and moving parts.
B. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-
second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches
from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION 08 4113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1
SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Finish hardware for doors as scheduled and specified herein, including:
a. Mechanical hardware for swinging doors.
2. Electro-mechanical devices and access control components as specified herein.
3. Any parts, components, materials, and accessories, whether specified or not, that are
required for a complete and operational access control system. Provide access control system with
features, capabilities, and operation at each door as specified herein.
B. Related Sections
1. Provide hardware complying with division 01 section “references” as well as the
following publications to the extent referenced within this specification.
a. Division 06 Section: “Finish Carpentry”
b. Division 08 Section: “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”
c. Division 08 Section: “Wood Doors”
d. Division 08 Section: “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”
e. Division 08 Section: “Overhead Coiling Doors”
f. Division 08 Section: “Automatic Door Operators”
1.02 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. Provide hardware in accordance with the following standards in addition to those specified in Division 01
Section “References.”
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), A117.1: Accessible and Usable Buildings
and Facilities, edition as adopted by local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
2. Builders Hardware Manufacturer’s Association (BHMA)
a. ANSI/BHMA A156.18: Materials and Finishes, 2006 edition
b. ANSI/BHMA A156.19: Power Assist and Low Energy Power Operated Doors, 2007
edition
3. Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
a. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors, 1993
edition
b. Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames, 2004 edition
c. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware, 1994 edition
d. Keying Systems and Nomenclature, 2003 edition
e. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule, 2001 edition
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
a. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, edition as adopted by
local AHJ.
b. NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening
Protectives, edition as adopted by local AHJ.
c. NFPA 252: Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, edition as adopted by
local AHJ.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 2
1. Coordinate layout, templating, and installation of work with other sections as required.
Provide templates, product information, schedules, and diagrams required to fully coordinate the
work.
a. Coordinate blocking for wall stops and other surface-applied hardware with Division 06
Section “Rough Carpentry.”
b. Coordinate hardware locations and templating with the appropriate Division 08 door and
frame sections.
c. Coordinate conduit, raceways, wiring, and connection as required for electrical and
pneumatic hardware items with the appropriate electrical, access control, intrusion detection,
and fire alarm sections.
d. Fire Rated Openings: Coordinate with door and frame manufacturer to ensure that total
opening complies with requirements for fire doors.
B. Pre-installation Meetings
1. Upon approval of hardware schedule and wiring diagram submittals and before hardware
installation, conduct a pre-installation meeting complying with Division 01 Section “Project
Management and Coordination.”
2. Meeting attendees shall include the owner’s representative, architect, contractor,
hardware supplier, hardware installer, other affected trades, and manufacturer representative(s) for
locks, exit hardware, operators, and closers.
3. Discuss the installation of continuous hinges, locksets, door closers, exit devices,
electromechanical finish hardware, and finish hardware. Coordinate installation between trades.
a. Discuss special installation requirements.
b. Inspect and discuss electrical rough-in and other preparatory work performed by other
trades.
c. Review sequence of operation for each electrified door opening.
d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
e. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures
4. At the meeting, distribute installation manuals, templates, wiring diagrams, and approved
hardware schedule submittals to each attendee.
5. Notify participants at least five (5) working days before meeting.
C. Keying Conference
1. Upon approval of hardware schedule and before ordering locking hardware and key
system, conduct a keying meeting complying with Division 01 Section “Project Management and
Coordination.”
2. Meeting attendees shall include the owner, owner’s security consultant, construction
manager, contractor, architect, and hardware supplier’s Architectural Hardware Consultant.
3. Discuss key system requirements and incorporate decisions made during the meeting into
the keying schedule submittal.
a. Review each locking function and determine degree of security required at each opening.
b. Review function of building, flow of traffic, and purpose of each area.
c. Determine degree of security at each opening.
d. Determine requirements for future expansion.
e. Discuss requirements for shipping and delivery of keys and cylinders/cores.
f. Discuss requirements to interface new cylinders/cores with owner’s existing key system.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Provide submittals in accordance with Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.”
2. Advise architect within the submittal package of incompatibility or issues which may
detrimentally affect the work of this section.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 3
3. Submittals shall be prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware
Consultant. Stamp submittals with the DHI certification seal and signature of the supervising
Architectural Hardware Consultant.
a. Submittals submitted without the above certification seal shall be marked incomplete and
returned.
4. Submittal sequence: Submit product data, hardware schedule, samples, and qualification
data concurrently. Coordinate submission of finish hardware schedule with scheduling requirements
of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in project construction
schedule. Upon approval of first submittal package, submit wiring diagrams and key schedule.
B. Product Data
1. Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each item of finish hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary
to show compliance with requirements.
2. Highlight relevant product information such as model, function, trim, finish, options,
electrical requirements, and accessories.
C. Hardware Schedule
1. Submit hardware schedule detailing fabrication and assembly of finish hardware, as well
as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final finish hardware sets with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of finish hardware.
2. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding
conditions. Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions.
a. Format schedule complying with the vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for
the Hardware Schedule" publication. Double space entries, and number and date each page.
Use same scheduling sequence and door numbers as in the Contract Documents
b. Include the following information:
1) Numerical door index indicating door number, heading number, and architect’s
specified hardware set number.
2) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating and material of each door and
frame.
3) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each finish hardware item.
Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.
4) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including
name and manufacturer.
5) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
a) Where universal-type closers are scheduled, indicate the application method to be
used for installation at each door (e.g. regular arm, parallel arm, or top jamb).
6) Location of each finish hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor
plans and in door and frame schedule.
7) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
8) Mounting locations for finish hardware.
9) Door and frame sizes and materials.
10) Description of each electrified finish hardware function, including location,
sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.
a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in
the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person
wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to
exit; loss of power; fire alarm sounds.
11) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame.
c. Submit, with the hardware schedule, a list of lead times for hardware items.
D. Keying Schedule
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 4
1. Submit keying schedule detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include
schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations complying with DHI’s
“Keying Systems and Nomenclature” publication.
E. Shop Drawings
1. Submit details of electrified finish hardware, indicating the following:
a. System schematic.
b. Point-to-point wiring diagram.
c. Riser diagram.
d. Elevation of each door.
2. Detail interface between electrified finish hardware and fire alarm, access control,
security building control system.
3. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified finish
hardware.
4. Include specific cable requirements; indicate twisted, shielded, and plenum rated cable
requirements where required by manufacture or relevant building codes and standards.
F. Manufacturer’s Templates
1. After final approval of the hardware schedule, provide templates for doors, frames, and
other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of finish hardware. Check shop
drawings of other work to ensure that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing finish
hardware to comply with indicated requirements. Provide additional templates, template lists,
hardware schedules, and product information to other trades upon request.
G. Qualification Certificates
1. For installer, supplier, and Architectural Hardware Consultant provide letters of
certification that indicate compliance with the requirements specified herein. Submit certifications
concurrently with hardware schedule submittal. Submittals will not be considered without
certifications.
a. Installer: Provide documentation showing installer’s past experience.
b. Supplier: Provide letters of certification from the hardware manufacturer stating that the
supplier is a factory direct authorized distributor. Provide documentation showing suppliers
past experience.
c. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Provide certificate showing consultant holds the
required certificate(s) from DHI.
1.05 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. Upon substantial completion, provide two (2) copies of the closeout submittals
complying with Division 01 Section “Close Out Submittals.”
B. Operation And Maintenance Data
1. Provide operation and maintenance manuals that include the following for each hardware
item:
a. Project information including contact information for architect, contractor, supplier,
installer, Architectural Hardware Consultant, and local representative of each hardware
manufacturer
b. Complete information on care, maintenance, adjustment, repair and replacement of parts,
and preservation of finishes
c. Product data, templates, installation information, service manual, and parts lists.
d. Copy of final hardware and keying schedules and wiring diagrams for each opening
connected to either 120V or low voltage power. Edit schedules and diagrams to reflect “As
installed” conditions.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 5
C. Warranty Documentation
1. Provide information required for warranty service or replacement of each hardware item
including:
a. Warranty certificates from manufacturer stating warranty period and conditions,
complying with warranty requirements specified herein.
b. Copy of manufacturer’s order confirmation or original packing slip with manufacturer’s
original order #, date of manufacture, and ship date.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Supplier Qualifications: Supplier shall have documented experience in the supply of
finish hardware for five (5) years or for three (3) prior projects similar in scope, size, and quality.
Supplier shall have an Architectural Hardware Consultant, complying with the requirements
specified herein, available to properly handle, detail, and service hardware in a satisfactory manner.
Architectural Hardware Consultant shall be available during the course of the work to consult with
contractor, architect, and owner about finish hardware and keying.
a. Supplier shall be a certified direct distributor and be a full sales and service organization
for the manufacturer(s) listed.
b. Supplier shall have warehousing facilities within Project’s Vicinity.
2. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have documented experience in the installation of
finish hardware for (5) years or for three (3) prior projects similar in scope, size, and quality.
3. Manufacturer Sourcing Qualifications: Obtain each type of finish hardware (hinges, latch
& locksets, exit devices, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated
as offering products complying with requirements.
a. Provide electrified hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical finish hardware
unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturer’s that perform electrical modifications that are
listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ)
are acceptable.
4. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is certified by DHI as
an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or Architectural Openings Consultant (AOC) and is
enrolled in the DHI Continuing Education Program. Consultant shall be experienced in providing
consulting services for finish hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent indicated.
B. Fire Door Assemblies
1. Provide finish hardware for fire rated openings that complies with NFPA 80 and the
requirements of the AHJ. Provide only items of finish hardware that are listed by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to the AHJ for use on types and sizes of doors indicated, based on
testing at positive pressure and according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C and in compliance with fire-rated
door and frame labels.
a. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors (with supplementary marking on door
label indicating “Fire Door to be Equipped with “Fire Exit Hardware”), provide label on exit
device indicating “Fire Exit Hardware.”
b. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved bearing type
hinges, and required gasketing if not furnished with door or frame.
C. Smoke And Draft Control Door Assemblies
1. Where smoke and draft control door assemblies are required, provide finish hardware that
meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with
NFPA 105.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 6
A. Marking And Packaging
1. Package hardware items manufacturer’s standard packaging, clearly marked with
hardware set number correlating to finish hardware schedule and architect’s door number.
B. Delivery And Acceptance
1. Coordinate with construction schedule and deliver packaged hardware items to place of
installation (e.g. project site, fabrication shop). Upon delivery, inspect and inventory finish
hardware. Immediately notify supplier of defective or missing items.
2. Deliver keys and cores to owner by registered mail or overnight package service. Ship
keys separately from cores.
C. Storage And Handling
1. Provide secure, dry storage area complying with Division 01 Section “Product Storage
and Handling Requirements” for finish hardware delivered to the project site, but not yet installed.
Store items on shelves or pallets to prevent damage.
2. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable
so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
D. Packaging Waste Management
1. Upon delivery and installation of finish hardware, discard packaging and other waste
items in accord with Division 01 Section “Cleaning and Waste Management.”
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty
1. Warrant finish hardware against defects in material and workmanship as set forth in
Division 01 Section “Warranties.”
2. Special warranties specified herein shall not deprive owner of other rights specified in the
contract documents, but shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranty
requirements.
B. Special Warranty
1. Provide a written warranty, executed by the product manufacturer agreeing to repair or
replace components of finish hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2) Faulty operation of operators and finish hardware.
3) Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal wear.
b. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion, except for:
1) Mortise Locks: Three (3) years
2) Exit Devices: Three (3) years
3) Door Closers: Twenty Five (25) years
4) Auto Operators: Two (2) years
5) Electrified Hardware Items: One (1) year
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Substitutions submitted, no later than 10 business days prior to bid and complying with Division 01 Section
“Substitutions” requirements will be reviewed for conformance to basis of design. Substitutions found in
compliance will be approved by bid addendum.
2.02 MATERIALS
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 7
A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's
standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially
recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated.
B. Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw
installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as
specifically indicated.
2.03 FASTENERS
A. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as
otherwise indicated. Furnish stainless steel (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish
or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including
"prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.
B. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no
standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Use through bolts only as indicated
in this section unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware
securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt
or use sex screw fasteners.
2.04 HINGES
A. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Ives
2. Stanley
3. McKinney
B. Requirements:
1. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:
a. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.
b. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
c. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood
screws.
2. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
a. Out-Swing Doors with Locks: Non-Removable Pins (NRP).
b. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
c. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
3. All hinges must be ball bearing.
4. Number of Hinges: At non-rated openings, provide two hinges for each door leaf 60
inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height or portion
thereof. At fire rated openings, provide no less than three ball bearing hinges for each door leaf 86
inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height or portion
thereof.
5. Hinge Width: Where applied trim or closer templating require hinge widths wider than 4-
1/2 inches, provide minimum width required. Otherwise, provide hinges 4-1/2 inches in width.
6. Hinge Height: Provide hinges 5 inches in height where door leaf exceeds 3’0 in width or
where door is a high-use door utilizing panic or push/pull hardware. Otherwise, provide hinges 4-1/2
inches in height.
7. Hinge Weight: Provide heavy weight hinges where door leaf exceeds 3’0 in width,
exterior doors, and at doors scheduled with swing clear hinges, panic hardware, push/pull hardware,
edge guards, or armor plates. Otherwise provide standard weight hinges.
2.05 CONTINUOUS HINGES
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 8
A. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Ives
2. Stanley
3. Select
B. Requirements:
1. Geared Continuous Hinges: Shall utilize a single gear section for the door leaf and a
separate gear section for the frame side of the door. Provide full mortise or surface applied hinge as
scheduled in each set. Geared hinges are to be UL 10C tested and approved for 90 minutes.
2.06 OPERATING DOOR TRIM
A. Door Bolts
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Ives
b. Rockwood
c. Trimco
2. Requirements:
a. Provide bolt model recommended by manufacturer for door material type.
b. Provide 1 inch throw stainless steel bolt with 12 inch length unless otherwise scheduled
in the sets.
B. Push Plates, Pull Plates, and Pulls
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Ives
b. Rockwood
c. Trimco
2. Requirements:
a. Offset Pull: Provide 10 inch center to center (CTC) pull with a 4 inch offset constructed
of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with a diameter of 1 inch.
b. Push/Pull Bar: Provide 10 inch center to center (CTC) pull with a 4 inch offset and door
pull equal to door width less 3 inches. Push/pull bar shall be constructed of stainless steel
with a diameter of 1 inch.
2.07 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. General:
1. Lock Chassis: Shall be made from steel, with locking spindles of stainless steel.
2. Latch Bolt: Shall be constructed of stainless steel with 3/4 inch throw on mortise locks
and 1/2 inch throw otherwise. Latch to be deadlocking on keyed functions.
3. Lever Trim: Shall be pressure cast brass, bronze, zinc, or steel with wrought rose design.
Levers are to be solid with no voids or plastic inserts.
4. Fire Rating: Lock shall be listed for up to 3 hours.
5. Strike Plates: Provide ANSI 4-7/8 inch strike plates. At pairs of doors, provide strike
with 7/8 inch flat lip. At single doors, provide round-lipped strike with lip length as required to
minimally clear jamb and trim. Provide dust box at each strike location.
B. Mortise Locks
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Schlage: L Series, 07A Trim Design, Substitutions by Architect approval
2. Requirements:
a. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1
Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing
components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance. Provide lock case
that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 9
b. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm)
throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25
mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.
c. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
d. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide
a request to exit (RX) switch that is actuated with rotation of inside lever.
e. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with
wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece
spindles.
f. Thumbturns: Provide thumbturns as enlarged, ADA designated style thumbturns.
g. Visual Indicator: Where scheduled, provide visual indicator showing “Vacant” or
“Occupied.”
2.08 ACCESS CONTROLLED LOCKS
A. Keypad Only Access Controlled Locks
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Schlage Electronics: CO-100, ATH Lever, Substitutions by Architect approval
2. Requirements:
a. Provide battery-operated standalone keypad lock with non-handed chassis of type
scheduled.
b. Lock shall have an incorporated 12 button keypad.
c. Lock shall have capacity for a minimum of 100 pin codes at least 4 digits in length.
d. Provide lock with functions and keying as scheduled.
e. Provide lock with emergency key override.
2.09 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Schlage: Everest 29, Substitutions by Architect approval
B. Requirements:
1. Full Size Interchangeable Cylinders: Provide cylinders of quantity and type and with the
appropriate cam/tailpiece to be compatible with the locking hardware provided. Provide cylinder
housings ready to accept 6-pin, Full-Size Interchangeable Cores (FSIC).
a. Permanent Cores: Ship cores directly to owner’s representative. At substantial
completion, accompany the owner’s representative while replacing temporary construction
cores with the owner’s permanent key system. Provide factory master-keyed cores.
2. Temporary Construction Keying: Provide each cylinder with temporary keying during the
construction period. At substantial completion, accompany the owner’s representative while voiding
construction keying. Provide temporary construction keying to comply with the following:
a. Keyed Temporary Cores: Provide interchangeable core compatible cylinders and levers
with keyed construction cores during the construction period. Cores will remain property of
the contractor and will be returned upon installation of owner’s permanent key system.
3. Keys: Provide cylinder manufacturer’s standard keys. Keys shall be shipped separate
from cores directly to owner’s representative. For estimating purposes, provide keys in the
following quantities:
a. Construction Control Keys: 2 each
b. Construction Change Keys: 12 each
c. Permanent Control Keys: 2 each
d. Permanent Master Keys: 2 each
e. Permanent Change Keys: 4 per core
2.10 EXIT DEVICES
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 10
A. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Von Duprin: 98 Series, Substitutions by Architect approval
B. Requirements:
1. Device Construction:
a. Exit device(s) shall have a mechanism case constructed of extruded aluminum or, base
plates constructed of cold rolled steel, push pad of extruded aluminum with stainless steel
covering, and end caps with flush mounted, sloped design. . Where required by stile width,
provide narrow-stile type device.
b. Latch return springs shall be compression type.
c. Dogging Mechanism: where dogging or latch-retraction options are not specifically
scheduled for non-fire rated doors, provide device with a hex-key activated hook-type dogging
mechanism constructed of steel.
d. Plastic or nylon used for the push pad, or parts in the dogging mechanism or latchbolt
mechanism are unacceptable.
e. Sound Dampening: Device shall be provided with factory-installed sound dampening
materials.
f. Provide device type, function, and trim style as indicated in hardware schedules.
2. Where exit device(s) are provided for fire rated door, provide with fire listing and label
indicating “Fire Exit Hardware.” If device is mounted on wood doors, provide sex nuts and bolts.
3. Provide shim kits, filler plates, and other accessories as required for each opening.
4. Unless otherwise indicated in the sets, provide device with roller-type strike.
2.11 MECHANICAL DOOR CLOSERS
A. General:
1. Valves: Closers shall have separate valves for latch speed, main speed, and back check.
Valves shall be staked to prevent accidental removal. Internal Pressure Relief Valves (PRVs) are
prohibited.
2. Provide the appropriate closer body, handing, and brackets to mount closer inside the
building on the least-public side of the door.
a. Where closers are to be mounted parallel arm, provide with heavy duty, fully forged
arms.
b. Where closers are to be mounted regular arm and the opening can otherwise be opened to
180 degrees, provide closer with the appropriate special templating to allow 180 degree door
swing. Where a special template is not available for 180 degree swing, provide closer arm
with integrated stop.
3. Integrated Stop Closer Arms: Where a closer with integrated stop is required, provide the
appropriate closer and arm as follows:
a. Parallel arm with spring-cushioned stop arm: Provide where door is otherwise able to
open to 95 degrees and requires a parallel arm mount closer.
b. Parallel arm with dead stop arm: Provide where door is obstructed from opening to 95
degrees and requires a parallel arm mount closer.
c. Regular arm with push side surface-mounted overhead stop: Provide where door closer
should mount on pull side of door.
4. Hold Open Arms: Provide closer arms with mechanical hold-opens as scheduled.
5. Provide closers with any special templates, brackets, plates, or other accessories required
for interface with header, door, wall, and other hardware. Provide closers with screw packs
containing thru-bolts, machine screws, and wood screws.
6. Closers shall be provided with all-weather fluid and shall not require readjustment from
120 degrees F to -30 degrees F. Fluid shall be non-flaming and shall not fuel door or floor covering
fires. Upon request, provide data indicating thermal properties of fluid.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 11
7. Closers shall close and latch door when adjusted to meet accessibility requirements for
door opening force: 8.5 lbs at exterior doors, 5 lbs at interior doors, and 15 lbs at labeled fire doors.
B. Cast Iron Heavy Duty Door Closers:
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. LCN: 4010/4110 Series, Substitutions by Architect approval
2. Requirements:
a. Closer Construction: Closer shall have cast iron body with 1-1/2 inch steel piston, double
heat treated pinion, 11/16 inch bearing journals, and full complement needle bearings. Closer
shall be adjustable from sizes 1 through 6.
b. Provide closers with spring size adjustment dial for ease of adjusting.
C. Aluminum Heavy Duty Door Closers:
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. LCN: 4050 Series, Substitutions by Architect approval
2. Requirements:
a. Closer Construction: Closer shall have cast aluminum body with 1-1/2 inch steel piston,
heat treated pinion, 11/16 inch bearing journals, and full complement needle bearings. Closer
shall be adjustable from sizes 1 through 6.
D. Aluminum Standard Duty Door Closers:
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. LCN: 1450 Series, Substitutions by Architect approval
2. Requirements:
a. Closer Construction: Closer shall have cast aluminum body with 1-1/4 inch steel piston,
heat treated pinion, 5/8 inch bearing journals, and full complement needle bearings. Closer
shall be adjustable from sizes 1 through 6.
2.12 AUTOMATIC OPERATORS (ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC)
A. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. LCN: 4600 Series, Substitutions by Architect approval
B. Requirements:
1. Provide low energy automatic operator units with hydraulic closer complying with ANSI
A156.19.
2. Provide units with conventional door closer opening and closing forces unless power
operator motor is activated. Provide door closer assembly with adjustable spring size, back-check,
and opening and closing speed adjustment valves to control door.
a. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal
closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30 degrees F.
3. Provide units with on/off switch for manual operation, motor start up delay, vestibule
interface delay, electric lock delay, and door hold open delay.
4. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details.
5. Provide actuator switches for operation as specified. Provide weather-resistant actuators
at exterior applications.
6. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and
parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for each individual
leaf.
7. Provide units with vestibule inputs that allow sequencing operation of two units, and
SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices.
2.13 ARCHITECTURAL DOOR TRIM
A. Protection Plates
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 12
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Ives
b. Rockwood
c. Trimco
2. Requirements:
a. Provide .050 inch thick stainless steel protection plates with height as scheduled. Plate
shall have four beveled edges. Provide no screw holes and adhesive as required by door
manufacturer’s fire labeling requirements. Otherwise provide plate manufacturer’s standard
countersunk fasteners.
b. Provide plate with width as follows:
1) Pairs of Doors: Provide plate to be 1 inch less door width.
2) Single Doors: Provide plate to be 2 inches less door width on push side, pull side
mounted plates to be 1 inch less door width.
B. Door Stops
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Ives
b. Rockwood
c. Trimco
2. Requirements:
a. Provide wall stops wherever possible.
b. Provide stops and holders as indicated in the HW sets.
2.14 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Glynn Johnson
2. Rixson
3. Sargent
B. Requirements:
1. Provide overhead stops and holders as scheduled, sized per manufacturer’s
recommendations based on door width.
2. Provide concealed overhead stops with adjustable jamb bracket.
3. Where possible without conflicting with other hardware, mount surface overhead stops
on least public side of door.
4. Provide stops with any special templates, brackets, plates, or other accessories required
for interface with header, door, wall, and other hardware.
2.15 SADDLE AND PANIC THRESHOLDS
A. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Zero International
2. National Guard
3. Pemko
B. Requirements:
1. Provide saddle thresholds with length equal to the width of the opening.
2. Provide panic thresholds with length equal to the overall frame width as well as with
mitered and welded ends.
3. Provide stainless steel machine screws and lead anchors for each threshold.
2.16 WEATHERSTRIP AND GASKET
A. General:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 13
1. Provide weather strip and gasketing as scheduled.
2. Size weather strip and gasket to provide a continuous seal around opening and at meeting
stiles.
B. Perimeter Seals
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Zero International
b. National Guard
c. Pemko
C. Astragals, Meeting Stiles, and Mullion Seals
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Zero International
b. National Guard
c. Pemko
2. Requirements
a. Where overlapping astragals are scheduled on exterior doors, provide with thru-bolts.
D. Door Bottoms
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Zero International
b. National Guard
c. Pemko
E. Rain Drips
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Zero International
b. National Guard
c. Pemko
2.17 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
A. Silencers
1. Manufacturers that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Ives
b. Rockwood
c. Trimco
2. Requirements:
a. Where indicated on single openings, provide 3 each grey rubber silencers on lock jamb.
b. Where indicated on paired openings, provide 2 each grey rubber silencers on header.
2.18 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES
A. Power Supplies
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Von Duprin: PS900 Series, Substitutions by Architect approval
2. Requirements:
a. Provide power supplies, recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the
electrified locking component, for the operation of electrified locks, electrified exit devices,
magnetic locks, electric strikes, and other components requiring a power supply.
b. Provide the appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for the proper operation of
the electrified locking component and/or components as recommended by the manufacturer of
the electrified locking components with consideration for each electrified component utilizing
the power supply, the location of the power supply, and the approved wiring diagrams. Locate
the power supplies as directed by the Architect.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 14
c. Provide a power supply that is regulated and filtered 24 VDC, or as required, and UL
class 2 listed.
d. Options: Provide the following options.
1) Provide a power supply, where specified, with the internal capability of charging
optional sealed backup batteries 24 VDC, or as required, in addition to operating the
DC load.
2) Provide sealed batteries for battery back-up at each power supply where
specified.
3) Provide keyed power supply cabinet.
4) Provide a power supply complete requiring only 120VAC to the fused input and
shall be supplied in an enclosure.
e. Provide a power supply with emergency release terminals, where required, that allow the
release of all devices upon activation of the fire alarm system complete with fire alarm input
for initiating “no delay” exiting mode.
B. Electric Power Transfers
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Von Duprin: EPT-10
b. Securitron: CEPT
2. Requirements:
a. Provide power transfer with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide
with number and gage of wires sufficient to accommodate electric function of specified
hardware.
b. Locate electric power transfer per manufacturer’s template and UL requirements, unless
interference with operation of door or other hardware items.
C. Door Contacts
1. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
a. Schlage Electronics: 679-05
b. Securitron: DPS Series
c. Security Door Controls: MC-4
2. Requirements:
a. Provide concealed, edge-mounted door contacts as appropriate for door/frame material.
2.19 HIGH SECURITY EMERGENCY KEY BOX
A. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Knox, Inc. 3200 Series x RMK
2. Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
B. Requirements:
1. Provide recess-mounted emergency key box as approved by the local fire jurisdiction.
Key box to be master-keyed as dictated by local fire jurisdiction.
2.20 KEY CONTROL CABINET
A. Products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Lund, Inc. 1200 Series
2. Substitutions as approved by Architect/Owner
B. Requirements:
1. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key
clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard
metal cabinet.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 15
2. Provide complete cross-index system set up by Owner, and place keys on markers and
hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule.
3. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2.21 FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull
units if no latch or locksets).
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and
other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced
standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in
ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes
shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized
standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
1. Oil-Rubbed Bronze or Dark Bronze Appearance
a. Oil-Rubbed Satin Bronze: ANSI 613.
b. Dark Bronze on Steel: ANSI 643.
c. Dark Bronze Colored Powder Coat: ANSI 695.
d. Saddle and Panic Thresholds: Anodized Aluminum.
e. Weatherstrip and Gasket: Dark Bronze Anodized Aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions of walls, flooring, doors, frames, and hardware are satisfactory for installation of
hardware.
1. Prior to installing doors and hardware, wash down of masonry and painting or staining of
doors and frames shall be completed.
2. Verify that walls have blocking behind wall mounted stop locations.
3. Verify that flooring does not interfere with door or hardware operation.
4. Ensure that frames are installed plumb, square, and true. Verify that doors and frames are
properly sized and handed and are correctly prepared for hardware installation.
5. Verify function, quantity, type, hand, and finish of hardware to be installed with the
approved hardware schedule.
6. Verify that electrical rough-in is complete and correctly located for each door.
B. Conditions that do not allow proper installation of hardware shall be corrected before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install door hardware as detailed in the approved hardware schedule using only approved
fasteners and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended procedures and methods.
2. Install hardware and signage at fire rated openings in accordance with NFPA 80
requirements.
B. Hardware Mounting Heights
1. Mount door hardware units at heights indicated, as follows, unless otherwise indicated or
required to comply with governing regulations.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 16
a. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
b. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames."
c. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
C. Clearances
1. Install doors, both rated and non-rated, in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements for
door clearances as follows:
a. 1/8 inch between door and frame head and jambs for wood doors
b. 3/8 inch between door and frame head and jambs for metal doors
c. 1/8 inch at meeting stiles of pairs of doors.
d. 3/4 inch undercut maximum.
D. Surface Mounted Door Closers
1. Install surface mounted door closers on room side of openings, except where prohibited
by scheduled hardware. Use appropriate arms, spacers, brackets, and accessories to properly install
surface mounted door closers. Adjust spring power to the appropriate setting to ensure the doors
reliably close under normal operating conditions.
E. Wall Mounted Door Stops
1. Locate wall mounted door stops at the appropriate height and location to properly contact
protruding door trim.
F. Gasketing
1. Install gasketing to provide a continuous seal around the perimeter of the opening. Install
soffit mounted hardware using the proper brackets, spacers, and accessories to allow proper
installation without cutting or notching gasketing material or mounting channels.
G. Overlapping Astragals
1. Install astragals at exterior doors using thru-bolts.
2. Where overlapping astragals are scheduled on out-swinging doors, provide for mounting
on the pull-side of the active leaf. Otherwise, provide for mounting on the push-side of the inactive
leaf.
3. Notching astragal is not acceptable. Where strike lip conflicts with astragal, provide
strike as specified in “Locks and Latches” article of this section.
H. Thresholds And Saddles
1. Trim, cut, and notch thresholds and saddles neatly to minimally fit the profile of the door
frame. Thresholds and saddles shall be set in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Architect will engage a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant
to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed
work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed
and adjusted.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. After building HVAC system is balanced and adjusted, conduct final adjustment of door closers. Verify
spring power of the surface mounted door closer is properly adjusted to close and latch the door and to
comply with the opening force requirements of ANSI A117.1 as follows:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 17
1. Doors with Closers shall take five (5) seconds to close from 90 degrees to 12 degrees.
2. Interior, non-fire rated swinging doors shall open with a maximum of 5 lbs of pressure.
3. Exterior doors and fire rated doors shall open with the minimum amount of pressure
required to positively close and latch the door.
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The following schedule of hardware sets shall be considered a guide and the supplier is cautioned to refer
to general conditions, special conditions, and the full requirements of this section. It shall be the hardware
supplier's responsibility to furnish all required hardware.
B. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and are required for completion of the
Work, a written statement of such omission, error, conflict, or other discrepancy shall be sent to the
Architect, prior to date specified for receipt of bids, for clarification by addendum.
C. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions or items of hardware not clarified prior
to bid opening.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 18
Hardware Group No. 01 For use on door #(s):
104B
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 IVE
1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM
LOCK
CO-100-MS-70-KP-ATH-JD 613 SCE
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA CONSTRUCTION CORE 23-030 ICX 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER (W/
SPRING STOP)
4111 SCUSH ST-1586 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 429AA @ HEAD & JAMBS DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A DBA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 655A/ AS REQ'D BY SILL DETAIL DBA ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
− LOCKSET IS NORMALLY SECURE.
− NORMAL CREDENTIAL UNLOCKS THE LOCK MOMENTARILY WHEN IN NORMALLY SECURED STATE.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− VALID TOGGLE CREDENTIALS ON THE EXTERIOR MAY BE USED TO CHANGE TO A PASSAGE OR
SECURED STATUS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
Hardware Group No. 02
For use on door #(s):
105
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080T 07A 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 695 LCN
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 328AA @ HEAD & JAMBS DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A DBA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 265A-223 DBA ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 19
Hardware Group No. 03 For use on door #(s):
303C
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 613 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
RX-QEL-98-NL 613 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057-ICX 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER (W/
SPRING STOP)
4111 SCUSH ST-1586 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 429AA @ HEAD & JAMBS DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A DBA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 655A/ AS REQ'D BY SILL DETAIL DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES
− AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL MOMENTARILY RETRACTS LATCHBOLT, ALLOWING ENTRY.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− RX SWITCH (INTEGRAL TO LOCKING HARDWARE) WILL SHUNT THE DOOR CONTACT AND ALLOW
FOR AUTHORIZED EGRESS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
− ON LOSS OF POWER, ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE IS DISABLED. DOOR IS LATCHED. TRIM REMAINS
SECURE.
Hardware Group No. 04 For use on door #(s):
402
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 07A 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 695 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 328AA @ HEAD & JAMBS DBA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A DBA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 265A-223 DBA ZER
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 20
Hardware Group No. 05 For use on door #(s):
401
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 IVE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 613 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070T 07A 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER (W/
SPRING STOP)
4111 SCUSH ST-1586 695 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 429AA @ HEAD & JAMBS DBA ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A DBA ZER
1 EA OVERLAPPING
ASTRAGAL
44SP STST ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 655A/ AS REQ'D BY SILL DETAIL DBA ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142A DBA ZER
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
− LOCKSET IS NORMALLY SECURE.
− NORMAL CREDENTIAL UNLOCKS THE LOCK MOMENTARILY WHEN IN NORMALLY SECURED STATE.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− VALID TOGGLE CREDENTIALS ON THE EXTERIOR MAY BE USED TO CHANGE TO A PASSAGE OR
SECURED STATUS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
Hardware Group No. 06 For use on door #(s):
203 204 205 206 212
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA OFFICE W/SIM
RETRACT
L9056T 07A 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 21
Hardware Group No. 07
For use on door #(s):
114
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 613 VON
1 EA FAIL SECURE MORTISE
LOCK
L9092TEU 07A RX 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 BLK IVE
1 EA CARD READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES
− AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL MOMENTARILY RELEASES OUTSIDE LEVER, ALLOWING ENTRY.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− RX SWITCH (INTEGRAL TO LOCKING HARDWARE) WILL SHUNT THE DOOR CONTACT AND ALLOW
FOR AUTHORIZED EGRESS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
− ON LOSS OF POWER, ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE IS DISABLED. DOOR IS LATCHED. TRIM REMAINS
SECURE.
Hardware Group No. 08
For use on door #(s):
209 211 223
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA ELEC CLASSROOM
LOCK
CO-100-MS-70-KP-ATH-JD 613 SCE
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA CONSTRUCTION CORE 23-030 ICX 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
− LOCKSET IS NORMALLY SECURE.
− NORMAL CREDENTIAL UNLOCKS THE LOCK MOMENTARILY WHEN IN NORMALLY SECURED STATE.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− VALID TOGGLE CREDENTIALS ON THE EXTERIOR MAY BE USED TO CHANGE TO A PASSAGE OR
SECURED STATUS.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 22
Hardware Group No. 09
For use on door #(s):
102 103
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK (W/
OCC/VAC IND)
L9040 07A L583-363 L283-722 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− LATCHBOLT RETRACTED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE UNLESS OUTSIDE IS LOCKED BY INSIDE
THUMBTURN.
− TURNING INSIDE LEVER OR CLOSING DOOR UNLOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER.
− TO UNLOCK FROM OUTSIDE, REMOVE EMERGENCY BUTTON, INSERT EMERGENCY THUMBTURN
(FURNISHED) IN ACCESS HOLE AND ROTATE.
− INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS.
− LOCK INDICATOR WILL READ OCCUPIED/VACANT.
Hardware Group No. 10
For use on door #(s):
208
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK (W/
OCC/VAC IND)
L9040 07A L583-363 L283-722 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− LATCHBOLT RETRACTED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE UNLESS OUTSIDE IS LOCKED BY INSIDE
THUMBTURN.
− TURNING INSIDE LEVER OR CLOSING DOOR UNLOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER.
− TO UNLOCK FROM OUTSIDE, REMOVE EMERGENCY BUTTON, INSERT EMERGENCY THUMBTURN
(FURNISHED) IN ACCESS HOLE AND ROTATE.
− INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS.
− LOCK INDICATOR WILL READ OCCUPIED/VACANT.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 23
Hardware Group No. 11
For use on door #(s):
225 226 227
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK (W/
OCC/VAC IND)
L9040 07A L583-363 L283-722 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA SRI FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− LATCHBOLT RETRACTED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE UNLESS OUTSIDE IS LOCKED BY INSIDE
THUMBTURN.
− TURNING INSIDE LEVER OR CLOSING DOOR UNLOCKS OUTSIDE LEVER.
− TO UNLOCK FROM OUTSIDE, REMOVE EMERGENCY BUTTON, INSERT EMERGENCY THUMBTURN
(FURNISHED) IN ACCESS HOLE AND ROTATE.
− INSIDE LEVER IS ALWAYS FREE FOR IMMEDIATE EGRESS.
− LOCK INDICATOR WILL READ OCCUPIED/VACANT.
Hardware Group No. 12
For use on door #(s):
229 230 231 232
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 07A L583-363 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
Hardware Group No. 13
For use on door #(s):
112 115A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER (W/
HOLD OPEN)
1450 HW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 24
Hardware Group No. 14
For use on door #(s):
213
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
Hardware Group No. 15
For use on door #(s):
116
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 613 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
2 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
Hardware Group No. 16
For use on door #(s):
214
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 25
Hardware Group No. 17 For use on door #(s):
221
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 613 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA MOUNTING PLATE 1450-18FC AS REQ'D 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
A CONFLICT MAY OCCUR BETWEEN THE OVERHEAD STOP THRU BOLT AND THE DOOR CLOSER
CYLINDER. IF THIS CONFLICT OCCURS A DROP PLATE WILL HAVE TO BE USED AND THE PLATE DRILLED
OUT TO PROVIDE CLEARANCE FOR THRU BOLT HEAD.
Hardware Group No. 18
For use on door #(s):
228
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 613 GLY
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
Hardware Group No. 19
For use on door #(s):
113
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
2 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB458 613 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1/DP2 AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
2 EA OH STOP 90S 613 GLY
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 26
Hardware Group No. 20 For use on door #(s):
219 220 222
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1450 RW/PA FC 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
Hardware Group No. 21
For use on door #(s):
303A 303D
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 640 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET L9010 07A 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4050 RW/PA 695 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" B-CS 613 IVE
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488S-BK @ HEAD & JAMBS BLK ZER
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 27
Hardware Group No. AL-01 For use on door #(s):
101A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT 710 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC
HARDWARE
LX-RX-QEL-98-NL-OP-110MD 710 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057-ICX 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190EZHD 10" O 613 IVE
1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 613 GLY
1 EA SURF. AUTO
OPERATOR
4642 WMS
(USE FLUSH CEILING MOUNT)
695 LCN
1 EA WEATHER RING 8310-801 PLA LCN
1 EA ACTUATOR, JAMB
MOUNT
8310-818T
@ INSIDE JAMB
695 LCN
1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-819F 695 LCN
1 EA ACTUATOR, WALL
MOUNT
8310-853T
@ EXTERIOR
695 LCN
1 EA FLUSH MOUNT BOX 8310-867F 695 LCN
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR MFG.
1 EA DOOR SWEEP BY DOOR MFG
1 EA THRESHOLD 655A/ AS REQ'D BY SILL DETAIL DBA ZER
1 EA CARD READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4RL VON
1 SET WIRING, PT TO PT
DIAGRAM &
ELEVATION
DIAGRAM
PROVIDED BY HARDWARE SUPPLIER
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES
− OPEN MODE: PANIC HARDWARE CAN BE ELECTRICALLY DOGGED FOR PUSH/ PULL OPERATION.
− CLOSED MODE: AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL MOMENTARILY RETRACTS LATCHBOLT, ALLOWING
ENTRY.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− OUTER ACTUATOR IS DISABLED BY LX SWITCH (INTEGRAL TO LOCKING HARDWARE). WHEN DOORS
ARE LATCHED, ACTUATOR IS DISABLED.
− INNER ACTUATOR IS ALWAYS ENABLED.
− IF DOOR IS LATCHED WHEN ENABLED ACTUATOR IS DEPRESSED, OPERATOR RETRACTS LATCHES
PRIOR TO OPENING.
− RX SWITCH (INTEGRAL TO LOCKING HARDWARE) WILL SHUNT THE DOOR CONTACT AND ALLOW
FOR AUTHORIZED EGRESS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
− ON LOSS OF POWER, ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE IS DISABLED. DOOR IS LATCHED. TRIM REMAINS
SECURE.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 28
Hardware Group No. AL-02 For use on door #(s):
216B
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD 710 IVE
1 EA DEADBOLT MS1850S 613 ADA
2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-062-ICX 613 SCH
2 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-10"-NO 613 IVE
1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 613 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 695 LCN
1 SET CLOSER BRACKET(S) AS REQ'D TO INSTALL CLOSER 695 LCN
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR MFG.
1 EA DOOR SWEEP BY DOOR MFG
1 EA THRESHOLD 655A/ AS REQ'D BY SILL DETAIL DBA ZER
Note A: DOUBLE KEYED LOCK REQUIRES APPROVAL BY THE AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION.
Hardware Group No. AL-03
For use on door #(s):
101B 201
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT 710 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON
1 EA FAIL SECURE MORTISE
LOCK
L9092TEU 07A RX 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 695 LCN
1 SET CLOSER BRACKET(S) AS REQ'D TO INSTALL CLOSER 695 LCN
1 EA DOOR STOP FS436/WS407CCV AS REQ'D 613 IVE
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR MFG.
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES
− AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL MOMENTARILY RELEASES OUTSIDE LEVER, ALLOWING ENTRY.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− RX SWITCH (INTEGRAL TO LOCKING HARDWARE) WILL SHUNT THE DOOR CONTACT AND ALLOW
FOR AUTHORIZED EGRESS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
− ON LOSS OF POWER, ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE IS DISABLED. DOOR IS LATCHED. TRIM REMAINS
SECURE.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 29
Hardware Group No. AL-04 For use on door #(s):
104A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112HD EPT 710 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 695 VON
1 EA FAIL SECURE MORTISE
LOCK
L9092TEU 07A RX 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 100S ADJ 613 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 695 LCN
1 SET CLOSER BRACKET(S) AS REQ'D TO INSTALL CLOSER 695 LCN
1 SET SEALS BY DOOR MFG.
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05 BLK SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR
OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
− FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES
− AUTHORIZED CREDENTIAL MOMENTARILY RELEASES OUTSIDE LEVER, ALLOWING ENTRY.
− MECHANICAL KEY OVERRIDE.
− RX SWITCH (INTEGRAL TO LOCKING HARDWARE) WILL SHUNT THE DOOR CONTACT AND ALLOW
FOR AUTHORIZED EGRESS.
− DOOR CONTACT MONITORS WHEN DOOR OPENS AND CLOSES.
− ON LOSS OF POWER, ELECTRIFIED HARDWARE IS DISABLED. DOOR IS LATCHED. TRIM REMAINS
SECURE.
Hardware Group No. CO-01 For use on door #(s):
106A
EACH TO HAVE:
CASED OPENING.
Hardware Group No. OH-01
For use on door #(s):
106 107 108 109 110 111
115B
EACH TO HAVE:
ALL HARDWARE PROVIDED BY OVERHEAD DOOR MANUFACTURER.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 30
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FIN MFR
1 EA KNOX BOX 3200 SERIES KNO
1 EA KEY CONTROL
CABINET
1200 SERIES LUN
END OF SECTION 08 7100
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 1
SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Storefront framing.
4. Glazed entrances.
5. Glazed curtain walls.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
ASTM C 1036.
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in
construction.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square.
1. Tinted glass.
2. Coated glass.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 2
3. Fire-resistive glazing products.
4. Insulating glass.
C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths.
D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings.
E. Qualification Data: For installers and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-
coated, low-e coatings.
F. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.
G. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:
A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who
are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass coated float glass and insulating glass
from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
G. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with
certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other
openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a
temperature rise rating of 450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 3
H. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in
which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which
insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 4
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated,
provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully
tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated
below:
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.
2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall
unit and for each lite.
3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
2. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).
C. Uncoated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Old Castle
b. Pilkington
c. Viracon
2. Tint Color: Blue-Green.
2.3 INSULATING GLASS
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG or
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Old Castle
b. Pilkington
c. Viracon
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 5
B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by
designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article.
2.4 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
2. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM silicone
or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of
profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or if
not designated as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 6
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791 or 795.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000 or
UltraPruf II SCS2900.
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295.
d. Pecora Corporation; 864 895 or 898.
e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C995.
C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing
agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for
applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
2.6 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with
a full bead of liquid sealant.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 7
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that
listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-
protection rating indicated.
2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
2.9 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type GL-1: Clear float glass.
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.
B. Glass Type GL-2: Clear fully tempered float glass.
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.
2. Provide safety glazing labeling.
2.10 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
A. Glass Type IG-1: Low-e-coated, tinted insulating glass.
1. Basis of Design: PPG Solarban R100 (2) Clear + Clear
2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
3. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
4. Outdoor Lite: Float glass or fully tempered float glass where indicated or required.
5. Interspace Content: Air.
6. Indoor Lite: Float glass or fully tempered float glass where indicated or required.
7. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.
8. Visible Light Transmittance: 42 percent minimum.
9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum.
10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum.
11. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.26 maximum.
12. Provide safety glazing labeling.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from
Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 9
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances
and to comply with system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is
subjected to movement.
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 10
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-
glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance
for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GLAZING 08 8000 - 11
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 8000
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MIRRORS 088300 - 1
SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:
1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachment
details.
C. Samples: For each type of the following:
1. Mirrors: 12 inches (300 mm) square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges.
2. Mirror Trim: 12 inches (300 mm) long.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Preconstruction test report.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified
warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that
are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of
the silver film.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MIRRORS 088300 - 2
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company.
2. Binswanger Glass.
3. Donisi Mirror Company.
4. D & W Incorporated.
5. Gardner Glass Products, Inc.
6. Glasswerks LA, Inc.
7. Guardian Industries Corp.
8. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc.
9. Lenoir Mirror Company.
10. National Glass Industries.
11. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions.
12. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.
13. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS
A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating
process.
B. Annealed Monolithic Glass Mirrors: Mirror Select Quality.
1. Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating approved by mirror manufacturer.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting
mirrors.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Franklin International.
b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MIRRORS 088300 - 3
c. Liquid Nails Adhesive.
d. Palmer Products Corporation.
e. Royal Adhesives & Sealants, LLC.
2. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE
A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing
channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover edges
of mirrors in a single piece.
1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8
inch (9.5 and 22 mm) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch
(1.0 mm).
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1) Andscot Company, Inc.
2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.
3) Stylmark, Inc.
2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 16 and 25 mm (5/8
and 1 inch) in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 1.0 mm (0.04 inch).
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1) Andscot Company, Inc.
2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.
3) Stylmark, Inc.
3. Finish: Manufacturers standard finish.
B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces. Locate and
size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
B. Mirror Edge Treatment: Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
MIRRORS 088300 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of
substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where
applicable.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images.
B. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting
surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install
fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
1. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and
to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as recommended in writing by
mirror manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088300
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1
SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
according to ASTM E 119.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel
studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 Gauge EQ (0.015 inch).
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, or where the top of and interior partition is attached to
floor or roof structure above, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated
for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:
1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 51-mm- (2-inch-)
deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due
to deflection of structure above.
C. Firestop Tracks (where required by fire rated assembly): Manufactured to allow partition heads
to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-
resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 2
a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.
b. Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM (Contractor’s Option 1)
A. Pre-manufactured suspended ceiling system by DONN Drywall Suspension Systems as
manufactured by DONN Corporation or by Architect approved equal.
B. Suspension system shall support the ceiling assembly, including 5/8 inch type X gypsum board
with a maximum deflection of 1/360 of the span.
C. The system shall consist of the following components:
1. Main Tees: 12’-0” in length and 1-1/2 inches in height with a double web design and a
rectangular bulb, a 1-1/2 inch flange with a rolled cap, cross tee holes located on four-
inch centers, hanger holes located on two-inch centers, and with an integral reversible
splice.
2. Cross Tees: 4’-0” in length and 1-1/2 inches in height with a double web design and a
rectangular bulb; 1-1/2 inch flange with a rolled cap, and with the web extended and
formed to provide a clenched high tensile steel end for positive mechanical interlock with
main tees.
3. Wall Track: 12’-0” in length formed in a channel shape with a 1-9/16 inch I.D. and 1-
inch legs.
2.4 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS (Contractor’s Option 2)
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm- (0.062-inch-)
diameter wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm- (0.048-inch-) diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Capable of sustaining, a load equal to 10 times that imposed
as determined by ASTM E 1190.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.12 mm (0.16 inch) in
diameter.
D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 1.34 mm
(0.053 inch) and minimum 13-mm- (1/2-inch-) wide flanges.
1. Depth: 38 mm (1-1/2 inches).
E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 3
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 1.34-mm (0.053-inch) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum
13-mm- (1/2-inch-) wide flanges, 19 mm (3/4 inch) deep.
2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled
steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.68 mm (0.027 inch).
b. Depth: 41 mm (1-5/8 inches).
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 22 mm (7/8 inch) deep.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.84 mm (0.033 inch).
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 13-mm- (1/2-inch-) deep members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and
other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide foam gasket.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply
to framing installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 4
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead
structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required
for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to
match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated.
5. Curved Partitions and Soffits:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 150
mm (6 inches) o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 610 mm (24 inches) o.c.
F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3
mm (1/8 inch) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 5
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that
extend through forms.
5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m (1/8
inch in 12 feet) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely
between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09 2216
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1
SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Tile backing panels.
3. Texture finishes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples:
1. Textured Finishes: 24-inch by 24-inch panel for each textured finish indicated and on
same backing indicated for Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
B. Low Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Gypsum.
2. CertainTeed Corp.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5. National Gypsum Company.
6. USG Corporation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 2
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and
mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.3 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-
resistive capability.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. American Gypsum; Firebloc Type C.
b. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Type C.
c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Fireguard C.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.; Firecheck Type C.
e. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield C.
f. USG Corporation; Firecode C Core.
2. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's
standard edges.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
4. Location: Use tile backing panels as substrate to all wall tile.
2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 3
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
B. Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063-T5.
1. Reveal: Fry Reglet Reveal Molding DRM-625-625
http://fryreglet.com/downloads_shapefinder/RevealMolding.pdf
a. 5/8” reveal for 5/8” drywall
b. Finish Clear Anodized Alum
c. Use pre-manufactured intersections at corners.
2. Reveal at outside corner: Fry Reglet Stepped Outside Corner DRMW 625-625
http://fryreglet.com/downloads_shapefinder/SteppedOutsideCorner.pdf
a. 5/8” reveal for 5/8” drywall
b. Finish Clear Anodized Alum
c. Use pre-manufactured intersections at corners.
2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: At wall types indicated, use unfaced, fiberglass thermal insulation;
full thickness of wall framing.
C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
c. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
d. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
e. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 4
2. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."
2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Primer: USG “First Coat” or equal as recommended by texture manufacturer.
B. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.
b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture.
c. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.
2. Texture: Light Orange Peel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 6.4- to 12.7-mm- (1/4- to 1/2-inch-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between
edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
2. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.
E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 5
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
4. Level 5: Behind presentation wall covering.
H. Texture Finish Application: Refer to section 09 9123-Interior Painting.
I. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
J. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 09 2900
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1
SECTION 09 3013 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Porcelain tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Glass accent tile.
4. Waterproof membrane.
5. Crack isolation membrane.
6. Metal edge strips.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples:
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and
composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not
less than 10 sq. ft.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 2
1. Installer meets the quality and workmanship of a five-star member of the National Tile
Contractors Association or a Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors'
Association of America.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for
types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced
by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements
specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Tile Type, T1: Glazed porcelain floor tile.
1. Basis-of-Design: Daltile Veranda Solids Colorbody Porcelain.
2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency.
3. Face Size:
a. Typical: 3 inches by 3 inches Mosaic, 12 7/8” x 12 7/8” sheet (32.8 cm x 32.8 cm
sheet).
b. Elevator: 13 inch by 20 inch
4. Face Size Variation: Rectified.
5. Thickness: 3/8 inch.
6. Face: Plain with square edges.
7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
9. Grout Color: As scheduled on drawings.
B. Tile Type T2 and T3: Glazed wall tile.
1. Basis-of-design: Daltile Artigiano Ceramic Wall Tile.
2. Module Size: 3 by 12 inches.
3. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm).
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges.
5. Finish: Semi-gloss, opaque glaze.
6. Tile Color and Pattern: As scheduled and shown on drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 3
7. Grout Color: As scheduled.
8. Trim: Bullnose at top of tile wainscot Shape # S-4369, 3 by 6 inches.
C. Glass Tile Type T-4: Factory-mounted mosaic glass tile, cast.
1. Basis-of-Design product, Daltile Lucent Skies.
2. Module Size: 3/8 by 4 inch Straight Joint Mosaic, mesh mounted on a 12 by 12 inch
sheet.
3. Sizing Category: Standard.
4. Tile Color and Pattern: As shown and scheduled on drawings.
5. Grout Color: As scheduled on drawings.
2.3 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10 and is
recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and
accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Mapei Aqua Defense
2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with
ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the
application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mapei Mapelastic
AquaDefense :
a. Bostik, Inc.; Durabond D-222 Duraguard Membrane.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.; Laticrete Hydro Ban.
2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Refer to Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board.
2.6 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mapei
Kerabond/Keralastic or equivalent by :
a. Bostik, Inc.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 4
b. Laticrete International, Inc.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added at Project site.
3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive at Project site.
4. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
2.7 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide MAPEI
Corporation; Kerapoxy CQ or a comparable product by one of the following:
a. Custom Building Products.
b. Laticrete International, Inc.
c. TEC; H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring
applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Schluter
Systems Profiles as follows or equivalent by the following:
a. Blanke Corporation.
b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc
2. CT to Carpet (CPT) – Schluter Reno-TK EBTK100 Brushed Stainless Steel 304.
3. CT to Concrete (CONC) – Schluter Reno-U EBU100 Brushed Stainless Steel 304.
C. Metal Edge Trim for Wall Tile: Schluter Rondec RO 80 EB; Brushed Stainless Steel. Provide at
outside corners and all exposed tile edges. Provide manufacturer’s connectors, inside corner
and outside corner parts as required for complete installation.
D. Metal Edge Trim for Cove Base: Schluter Dilex HKU Model # HKUR10 EB; Brushed
Stainless Steel 304. Provide manufacturer’s connectors, inside corner and outside corner parts
as required for complete installation.
E. Movement Joint Sealant: Basis-of-Design product: Subject to compliance with the
requirements, provide Mapei Mapesil or equivalent. Provide movement joint sealant at all
perimeter joints (inside corners) at 1/8” width minimum and other areas as noted on the
drawings.
F. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 5
G. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.
H. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances
required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with
surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-
setting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the
ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and
grouting materials used.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 6
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are
flush.
F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Wall tile: 1/8 inch.
2. Floor Tile: 1/8 inch.
H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
I. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written
instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding
material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.
3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation at concrete floors: TCNA F115; thinset mortar; epoxy grout.
a. Ceramic Tile Type: T1.
b. Waterproof memebrane.
c. Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
d. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W245-15 or TCNA W248-15; thinset mortar on glass-
mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board, epoxy grout.
a. Ceramic Tile Type: T2, T3 and T4.
b. Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. Provide white mortar at glass tile.
c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
END OF SECTION 09 3013
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1
SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0
percent of quantity installed.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
B. Ceiling products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A. Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
C. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS – APC
A. Basis-of-Design product, Armstrong Ultima Item No. 1911 or architect approved equivalent.
B. Classification: Type IV, Form 2, Pattern E.
C. Color: White.
D. LR: 0.90.
E. NRC: 0.75.
F. CAC: 35.
G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled Tegular.
H. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Basis-of-Design Product Armstrong 15/16” Prelude suspension system or architect approved
equivalent.
B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation;
with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white .
C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that
used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
Shadow Molding: Model # 7871 with ¾ inch flange and ¾ inch reveal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
END OF SECTION 09 5113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1
SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient base.
2. Rubber stair accessories.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12
inches (300 mm) long.
1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Resilient Base: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
indicated, but not less than 10 linear feet.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE - RUB
A. Basis-of-Design product Roppe Pinnacle Rubber Wall Base or architect approved equivalent.
Other manufacturers include but are not limited to:
1. Armstrong
2. Johnsonite
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,
homogeneous).
1. Style and Location:
a. Style B, Cove
C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2
D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H. Colors: As scheduled.
2.2 RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES – RUB2
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Basis-of-Design Roppe Raised Design Rubber Tread of approved equivalent. #80 Ribbed
Light-Duty Square Nose Tread with Smooth Safety Strip. Use smooth landing tile.
C. Stair Treads: ASTM F 2169.
1. Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
2. Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed).
3. Group: 1 (embedded abrasive strips).
4. Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees.
5. Nosing Height: 1 9/16 inch.
6. Thickness: 1/8 inch to 5/64 inch.
7. Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
D. Separate Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate; produced by same
manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.
1. Style: Coved toe, 7 inches (178 mm) high by length matching treads.
2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by
manufacturer for installation with treads.
F. Locations: Stair 303.
G. Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product
manufacturer for applications indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient
products and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to
ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are
to be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.
H. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Stair Accessories:
1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
3. Use only one tread and riser per stair, do not seam.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 6513
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1
SECTION 09 6519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubber floor tile.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,
doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.
1. Show details of special patterns.
C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Rubber Floor Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type
indicated, but not less than 100 sq. ft.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2
B. Flooring products shall comply with the requirements of the California Department of Public
Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."
2.2 RUBBER FLOOR TILE RUB1
A. Capri Fitness and Rec Re-Tire recycled rubber, Tone.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class I-B, Homogeneous Rubber Tile, through mottled.
C. Hardness: Manufacturer's standard hardness, measured using Shore, Type A durometer
according to ASTM D 2240.
D. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
E. Thickness: 8mm.
F. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
G. Colors and Patterns: As scheduled.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer
for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit
floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor
tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing.
4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to
floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method
recommended by access flooring manufacturer.
D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
E. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be
installed.
F. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
floor tile.
3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using
cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1. Lay tiles with vertical ashlar pattern as defined by manufacturer.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent
fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers,
and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4
between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 6519
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 1
SECTION 09 6813 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modular carpet tile.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where
cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
3. Type of subfloor.
4. Type of installation.
5. Pattern of installation.
6. Pattern type, location, and direction.
7. Pile direction.
8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
10. Transition details to other flooring materials.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required.
1.4 IINFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers
Association at the Commercial II or Master II certification level.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 100 sq. ft.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE – CPT 1
A. Basis-of-Design product Mannington Commercial, Divergent Collection.
B. Color: As scheduled.
C. Pattern: Current.
D. Installation Method: Horizontal Brick Ashlar as defined by manufacturer.
E. Fiber Content: Econyl (100% type 6 Nylon).
F. Fiber Type: 100% Solution Dyed.
G. Pile Characteristic: Textured Patterned Loop.
H. Density: 6,352.
I. Backing: Infinity Modular Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer.
J. Size: 18 by 36 inches.
K. Performance Characteristics:
1. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 4 minimum according to ASTM D 7330.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 3
2. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.
3. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to
AATCC 16, Option E.
4. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134.
2.2 CARPET TILE – CPT 2
A. Basis-of-Design product Mannington Commercial.
B. Color: As scheduled.
C. Pattern: Boucle.
D. Installation Method: As shown on drawings.
E. Fiber Content: Ultron Type 6,6 Nylon.
F. Fiber Type: Yarn Dyed.
G. Pile Characteristic: Textured Patterned Loop.
H. Density: 7,826
I. Backing: Infinity Modular Reinforced Composite Closed Cell Polymer.
J. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
K. Performance Characteristics:
1. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe traffic, 4 minimum according to ASTM D 7330.
2. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC 165.
3. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40 AFU (AATCC fading units) according to
AATCC 16, Option E.
4. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kV according to AATCC 134.
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
C. Metal Transition Strips:
1. At CPT to Concrete: Schluter Reno-U EBU80 Brushed Stainless Steel.
2. At CPT to RUB2: Schluter Reno-U EBU80 Brushed Stainless Steel.
3. Installation: Fill backside of profile with thin set and set the anchoring leg in thinset
before installing carpet flooring. Re: 093000 Tiling for Thinset Specifications.
4. At CPT to CT: Re: Specification Section 093000 Tiling.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Concrete Slabs:
1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6
sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas
evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only
after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate recommended by the
flooring and adhesive manufacturer in writing.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum percent relative humidity level
measurement recommended by the flooring and adhesive manufacturer in writing.
c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet
tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
B. Wood Subfloors: Verify that underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that
may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.
C. Metal Subfloors: Verify that underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that
may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.
D. Painted Subfloors: Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive
carpet tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8
mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that
are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using
solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile
manufacturers.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TILE CARPETING 096813 - 5
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet"
and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut
edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable
flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
I. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and
fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 6813
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 09 8433 - 1
SECTION 09 8433 - SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes shop-fabricated, sound-absorbing wall panel units tested for acoustical
performance.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For sound-absorbing wall units provide layout and dimensions of panels
indicating work to be built into panels for all walls scheduled to receive panels. Include
mounting devices and details.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each fabric, color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sound-absorbing wall units meeting the following
as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84, Class A.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50.
B. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS 09 8433 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOUND-ABSORBING WALL UNITS – ACOUSTICAL BLANKET
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Owens Corning Select Sound Acoustic Blanket or architect approved
equivalent.
1. Mounting: Manufacturer’s recommended adhesive
2. Nominal Overall Panel Thickness: 1 inch.
3. Water Vapor Sorption: ASTM C1104 <3% by weight at 120 degree F, 95% RH
4. Fungi Resistance: ASTM C1338, meets requirement.
5. Corrosiveness: ASTM C665 Corrosiveness Test
6. Maximum Air Velocity: UL 181 Erosion Test 6,000 fpm
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Core Materials: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Mounting Devices: Concealed on back of unit, recommended by manufacturer to support
weight of unit, and as follows:
1. Adhesive.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Use manufacturer's standard construction except as otherwise indicated; with facing
material applied to face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable core; and with rigid
edges to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage.
B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1.6 mm (1/16 inch).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install sound-absorbing wall units in locations indicated in pattern shown with vertical surfaces
and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other units, faces flush, and scribed to
fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations.
B. Comply with sound-absorbing wall unit manufacturer's written instructions for installation of
units using type of mounting devices indicated. Mount units securely to supporting substrate.
C. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 09 8433
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1
SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
2. Steel and iron.
3. Galvanized metal.
4. Gypsum board.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m).
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra paint materials described below that are from the same production run (batch mix)
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co., Denver, CO (303) 294-9229; www.benjaminmoore.com.
2. KWAL Paint Company, Denver, CO. (303) 371-5600: www.kwalpaint.com
3. Sherwin-Williams Co., Santa Fe Springs, CA (888) 792-2662, ext. 102;
www.sherwin-williams.com .
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its
"MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and
substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3
C. Colors: As scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical Work:
a. Uninsulated metal piping.
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.
c. Pipe hangers and supports.
d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets
and outlets.
e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
2. Electrical Work:
a. Switchgear.
b. Panelboards.
c. Conduit and fittings.
d. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field
painting.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At the end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials
from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, and leave in an undamaged
condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Paint all interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout the project, except
prefinished items and as otherwise indicated.
B. If any existing paints are oil based, used manufacturer’s recommended oil based primer
compatible with listed finish coat.
C. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry:
1. Semi-Gloss Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5
a. Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block filler.
1) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25.
b. Finish Coats: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior
application.
1) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss, B31-2600 series, 0
g/L VOC
D. Gypsum Board: Provide the following primer over new interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
a. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600, 0
g/L VOC.
E. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish Gypsum Wall Board: Two finish coats over a primer. Primer for new
gypsum wall board only.
a. Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer,
B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC.
b. Finish Coats: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior
application.
1) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200
Series.
c. Location: Gypsum Wall Board Ceilings and Soffits.
2. Semi-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish Gypsum Wall Board Walls: Two finish coats over a
primer. Primer for new gypsum wall board only.
a. Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer,
B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC.
b. Finish Coats: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1) Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-
2600 Series.
c. Location: Gypsum Wall Board Walls.
F. Gypsum Board with High Performance and/or Epoxy Coating: Provide the following finish
systems over interior gypsum board surfaces where a high performance coating or epoxy
coating is indicated on the finish schedule and in restrooms.
1. Primer: Sherwin Williams ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC
2. 1st coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water-Based Epoxy Semi-Gloss,
K46 series, <150 g/L VOC
3. 2nd coat: Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water-Based Epoxy Semi-
Gloss, K46 series, <150 g/L VOC
4. Location: Rooms as indicated on drawings.
G. Wood: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Primer: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6
1) Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series.
b. Finish Coats: Factory-formulated semigloss block-resistant acrylic-latex enamel
for interior application.
1) Sherwin-Williams; ProClassic Waterborne Interior Acrylic Semi-Gloss
Enamel B31W20 Series.
H. Ferrous and Non Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer.
1) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310
series.
b. Finish Coats: Factory-formulated semigloss block-resistant acrylic-latex enamel
for interior application.
1) Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650
series.
END OF SECTION 09 9123
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 1
SECTION 09 9300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following
substrates:
1. Interior Substrates:
a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).
b. Wood veneer panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 200 mm (8 inches)
square.
2. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.
1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 3.8 L (1 gal.) of each
material and color applied.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. MPI Standards:
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved
Products List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 2
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C (45 deg F).
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures
are between 10 and 35 deg C (50 and 95 deg F).
B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3
deg C (5 deg F) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C. Do not apply exterior finishes in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. Kwal Paint.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.
B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and,
for interior stains and finishes applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
1. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
2. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.
3. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior stains and finishes shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
D. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 3
2.3 WOOD FILLERS
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.
2.4 STAINS
A. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90.
2.5 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES
A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured with an
electronic moisture meter.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to
be finished. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide
surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing.
1. After completing finishing operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for
each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly
with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding
lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal
and as recommended by stain manufacturer.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 4
3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate rust
leach stains.
D. Interior Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.
3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated.
2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces.
3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks,
runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced finished wood surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including finish carpentry substrates:
1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss Level 4).
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 5
END OF SECTION 09 9300
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS 09 9735-1
SECTION 09 9735 - FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Systems for field applied dry erase coatings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 16: Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B. Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Standards: P1 to P24.
C. Gypsum Association (GA): GA 214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of Painting Terms: ASTM D 16, unless otherwise specified.
B. DFT: Dry film thickness.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for each coating, including
generic description, complete technical data, storage and handling requirements and
application instructions.
B. Color Samples: Prepare color and finishes samples, 8-1/2 inches x 11 inches in size.
Samples shall be resubmitted as requested until required sheen, color, and texture is
achieved. Label and identify each sample as to location and application.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Quality Assurance: Submit manufacturer’s certification that coatings
comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s recommended maintenance and
cleaning instructions for the coated surfaces.
B. Warranty: 3 signed copies.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer of high performance coatings with a demonstrated minimum of
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS 09 9735-2
10 years of successful experience.
2. Manufacturer shall supply a list of successfully completed projects of a comparable
type.
3. Source Responsibility: Coatings shall be products of a single supplier.
B. Applicator’s Qualifications:
1. Experienced in application of specified coatings for a minimum of 5 years on
projects of similar size and complexity to this Work.
2. Applicator's Personnel: Supervisory personnel shall be trained/experienced in the
successful application of the specified coatings.
C. Comply with applicable codes and regulations of government agencies having jurisdiction
over airborne emissions, rinse runoff and industrial waste disposal. Where those
requirements conflict with this specification, comply with the more stringent provisions.
D. Comply with current applicable regulations of the state and local air pollution control
agencies/districts and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
E. Mock-ups:
1. Before proceeding with the work, apply a sample area of approximately 100 sq ft,
including primer, to an area as directed by the Architect.
2. Prepare mock-ups for Architect’s review and to establish requirements for substrate
finish and final coating application, texture, sheen and color.
3. Correct areas, modify method of application and installation, or adjust finish
texture as directed by the Architect to comply with the specified requirements.
4. Maintain mock-up accessible to serve as a standard of quality for this Section.
5. Accepted mock-up may remain in place.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and
packaging, with all labeling clearly identifying:
1. Coating or material name.
2. Manufacturer.
3. Color name and number.
4. Batch or lot number.
5. Date of manufacture.
6. Mixing and thinning instructions.
B. Storage:
1. Store materials in a clean, dry area and within temperature range in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Keep containers sealed until ready for use.
3. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer’s shelf life limitations.
C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or
contamination.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS 09 9735-3
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather:
1. Air and Surface Temperatures: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings
within air and surface temperature range in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. Surface Temperature: Minimum of 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above dew point.
3. Relative Humidity: Prepare surfaces and apply and cure coatings within relative
humidity range in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Ventilation: Provide ventilation during coating evaporation stage in confined or enclosed
areas in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Dust and Contaminants:
1. Schedule coating work to avoid excessive dust and airborne contaminants.
2. Protect work areas from excessive dust and airborne contaminants during coating
application and curing.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Water penetration through the coating.
b. Deterioration of coating beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. The manufacturer's warranty is be fully paid for by the coating applicator. The Warranty is
to cover both labor and materials, without financial limits, required to remove defective
materials and recoat areas in which moisture has penetrated structurally sound materials.
C. Provide warranty signed by the Contractor, coating applicator and manufacturer.
D. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have
against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. MDC FUZETM Dry Erase Coating, MDC, 400 High Grove Blvd, Glendale Heights,
Illinois (847) 473-4000.
2. Or other as approved by Architect.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS 09 9735-4
B. Dry erase coating performance requirements:
1. Colors: Clear.
2. VOC (EPA Method 24)
a. Clear 89 g/L Part A&B mixed.
3. Solids:
a. Clear 92 percent.
4. Gloss: ASTM D 523.
a. Clear 90+ at 60 degrees.
5. Fire Rating: ASTM E 84, Class A.
2.2 INTERIOR COATING SYSTEMS
A. Gypsum Board:
1. System Type: Acrylic primer / modified epoxy dry erase topcoat.
2. Surface Preparation: Remove hardware, accessories, plates and similar items to
allow dry erase coatings to be installed.
3. Primer and Acrylic colored wall paint as specified in section 099123 Interior
Painting
4. Finish Coat: MDC FUZETM.
5. Sheen: Gloss
6. Total DFT: 4.0 to 8.0 mils.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Use accessories required for application of specified coatings in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations, including thinners.
1. Roller: Purdy White Dove 1/4 inch nap roller as included in kit by manufacturer.
No substitutions permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which dry erase coating system is to be applied.
Notify Architect of areas or conditions not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or
application until unacceptable areas or conditions have been corrected.
B. Wall surfaces to receive dry erase coating shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, loose
paint and scale.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT SCHEDULED TO BE COATED
A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated from damage during
surface preparation and application of coatings.
B. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS 09 9735-5
be coated.
3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Gypsum Board:
1. Prepare gypsum board surfaces in accordance with Level 5 Drywall Finish.
2. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other
contaminants.
3. Sand joint compound smooth and feather the edge to match.
4. Avoid heavy sanding of adjacent gypsum board surfaces, which will raise nap of
paper covering.
5. Do not apply putty, patching pencils, caulking, or masking tape to gypsum board
surfaces to be painted.
6. Lightly scuff sand tape joints after priming to remove raised paper nap. Do not
sand through primer
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mix and thin coatings, including multi-component materials, in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination.
D. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits.
E. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
F. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT.
G. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect
performance or appearance of coating systems.
3.5 REPAIR
A. Materials and Surfaces Not Scheduled To Be Coated: Repair or replace damaged materials
and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.
B. Damaged Coatings: Touch-up or repair damaged coatings. Touch-up of minor damage
shall be acceptable where result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat
entire surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture, or color.
C. Coating Defects: Repair, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, coatings that
exhibit film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or
appearance of coating systems.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of surrounding areas and surfaces.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIELD APPLIED DRY ERASE COATINGS 09 9735-6
3.7 PROTECTION OF COATING SYSTEMS
A. Protect surfaces of coating systems from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 1
SECTION 10 1100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Visual display board assemblies – factory fabricated (marker & projection wall)
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
2. Show locations of panel joints.
C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.
D. Product Schedule: For visual display units.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer’s limited five-year warranty against manufacturing defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 2
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY- MARKER AND PROJECTION WALL
A. Basis-of-Design Claridge Markerwall or architect approved equivalent.
B. Visual Display Board Assembly: factory fabricated, field assembled.
1. Assembly: markerboard.
2. Corners: Square.
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.
1. Basis-of-Design LCS3 Porcelain panel mounted on 7/16” MDF with moisture barrier
backing. Low Gloss for projection and magnetic.
2. Color: White.
D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick,
extruded aluminum; No. 1016 Perimeter trim.
1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or
exposed joints.
2. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.
E. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, as indicated on drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
F. Combination Assemblies: Provide hidden spline between abutting sections of visual display
panels.
G. Accessories: For each markerboard provide the following accessories
1. Magnetic Accessory Tray with Satin Alum Finish. Claridge Product # 264M
2. LCS Markers and Microfiber Eraser Cloth with Magnet for hanging. Claridge Product #
LCS668-4.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-
coat process.
B. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1.
D. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
E. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.
F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 3
G. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific
type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing
by visual display unit manufacturer.
2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine walls and partitions for proper backing for visual display surfaces.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Remove dirt, scaling paint, projections, and depressions that will affect smooth, finished
surfaces of visual display boards.
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, and substances that will impair bond between visual display boards and
surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,
and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories necessary for complete installation.
B. Install visual display surfaces according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
C. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim,
and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate
with minimum number of joints, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings.
2. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to
normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100 - 4
Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions
indicated.
D. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and
grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than
16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.
END OF SECTION 10 1100
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 1419 - 1
SECTION 10 1419 - DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast dimensional characters.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by other
installers, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign at least half
size.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 1419 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Signs and supporting elements shall withstand the effects of gravity and
other loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
B. Thermal Movements: For exterior fabrications, allow for thermal movements from ambient and
surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS
A. Cast Characters: Characters with uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and
profiles, and as follows:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a. A.R.K. Ramos.
b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
c. Gemini Incorporated.
2. Character Material: Cast Aluminum.
3. Character Height: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Font: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Text: As indicated on Drawings.
6. Finishes:
a. Integral Aluminum Finish: Anodized color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer’s full range.
7. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signs,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
2. For exterior exposure, furnish stainless-steel devices unless otherwise indicated.
3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:
a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise
indicated.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 1419 - 3
4. Sign Mounting Fasteners:
a. Concealed Studs: Concealed (blind), threaded studs welded or brazed to back of
sign material, screwed into back of sign assembly, or screwed into tapped lugs cast
integrally into back of cast sign material, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.
1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist
water penetration and retention.
2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring
exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed
and contact surfaces.
3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are
inconspicuous.
4. Internally brace dimensional characters for stability, to meet structural performance
loading without oil-canning or other surface deformation, and for securing fasteners.
5. Provide rabbets, lugs, and tabs necessary to assemble components and to attach to
existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where
possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.
6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and
other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff
castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before
finishing.
B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign
construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as
required.
1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish to
match sign-background color color unless otherwise indicated.
2. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets to match sign background finish unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign
surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that
would impair installation.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
DIMENSIONAL LETTER SIGNAGE 10 1419 - 4
3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous
paint.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar
or bracket supports in position, so that signage is correctly located and aligned.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
END OF SECTION 10 1419
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 1423 - 1
SECTION 10 1423 - PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Panel Signs for Room Identification.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For panel signs.
1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.
2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by
others, and accessories.
3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braill,
and layout for each sign at to scale.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1. Provide a mockup sample sign for final approval. If approved mockup sign can be used
in project installation.
D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 1423 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 SIGNS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. APCO Graphics, Inc.
2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
3. Best Sign Systems Inc.
B. Panel Sign: Sign with smooth, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform
faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Takeform Quad Fusion 1.
2. Signage System
a. The signage shall incorporate a decorative laminate face with applied graphics
including all tactile requirements in adherence to ADA specifications.
b. All signs, including work station and room ID's, overheads and flag mounts,
directionals and directories shall have a matching appearance and constructed
utilizing the same manufacturing process to assure a consistent look throughout.
3. Materials:
a. Sign face shall be 0.035” (nominal) standard grade, high pressure surface laminate.
A painted sign face shall not be acceptable.
b. The sign shall incorporate balanced construction with the core sandwiched
between laminates to prevent warping. Laminate on the sign face only shall not be
acceptable.
c. Tactile lettering shall be precision machined, raised 1/32", matte PETG and
subsurface colored for scratch resistance.
d. Signs shall incorporate a metal accent bar. Bars shall be clear anodized with a
satin finish. Painted bars shall not be acceptable. Refer to drawings.
4. Standard Colors:
a. Face/background color shall be standard grade, high pressure laminate, as
scheduled.
b. Standard tactile colors shall match manufacturer's ADA standard color selection,
as scheduled.
5. Construction:
a. The signage shall, with the exception of directories and directionals, be a uniform
8 ½” width to facilitate inserts printed on standard width paper.
b. Insert components shall have a .080 thickness non-glare acrylic window and shall
be inlaid flush to sign face for a smooth, seamless appearance.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 1423 - 3
c. The signage shall include modules allowing for inserts, notice holders, occupancy
sliders, marker, magnetic, and cork boards. All modules shall be flush to sign face
for a smooth, seamless appearance.
d. The laminates (front and back) shall be pressure laminated and precision machined
together to a 90-degree angle. Edges shall be smooth, void of chips, burrs, sharp
edges and marks.
e. The signage shall utilize an acrylic sphere for Grade II Braille inserted directly into
a scratch resistant, high pressure laminate sign face. Braille dots are to be pressure
fit in high tolerance drilled holes.
f. Braille dots shall be half hemispherical domed and protruding a minimum 0.025”.
g. The signage shall utilize a pressure activated adhesive. The adhesive shall be
nonhazardous and shall allow for flexing and deflection of the adhered components
due to changes in temperature and moisture without bond failure.
h. All signs shall be provided with appropriate mounting hardware. Hardware shall
be finished and architectural in appearance and suitable for the mounting surface.
i. Some signs may be installed on glass. A blank backer is required to be placed on
the opposite side of the glass to cover tape and adhesive. The backer shall match
the sign in size and shape.
6. Typeface / Font: ADA compliant
7. Printed Inserts:
a. The signage shall be capable of accepting paper or acetate inserts to allow
changing and updating as required. Insert components shall have a 0.080”
thickness non-glare acrylic window and shall be inlayed flush to sign face for a
smooth, seamless appearance.
b. The signage contractor shall provide and install all signage inserts.
c. Manufacturer shall provide a template containing layout, font, color, artwork and
trim lines to allow Owner to produce inserts on laser or ink jet printer. The
template shall be in an Acrobat or Word format (.pdf).
8. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard method for substrates indicated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage,
noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:
1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors unless indicated to be exposed.
B. Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 1.14 mm (0.045 inch)
thick, with adhesive on both sides.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Surface-Engraved Graphics: Machine engrave characters and other graphic devices into panel
surface indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.
1.
2. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet
to expose contrasting core ply.
B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to
produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 1423 - 4
C. Subsurface-Engraved Graphics: Reverse engrave back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill
resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard
background color coating over enamel-filled copy.
D. Shop- and Subsurface-Applied Vinyl: Align vinyl film in final position and apply to surface.
Firmly press film from the middle outward to obtain good bond without blisters or fishmouths.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign
surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard.
3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that
would impair installation.
B. Mounting Methods:
1. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of
suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive
away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility
of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.
Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.
2. Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of sign and of suitable quantity to support
weight of sign without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign
edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.
END OF SECTION 10 1423
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1
SECTION 10 2800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES (Women 102, Men 103, and Toilet 208)
A. Waste Receptacle – WR1:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2
1. Basis-of-Design Bobrick B-2300 Floor-Standing Stainless Steel Waste Receptacle with
black steel domed top, no cover or architect approved equivalent. Other equivalent
manufacturer’s include but are not limited to:
a. Bradley Corporation
b. American Specialties
2. Mounting: Freestanding.
3. Minimum Capacity: 18 gal. (49.2 L).
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
5. Liner: Reusable galvanized steel liner
B. Liquid-Soap Dispenser, Countertop mounted - SD:
1. Basis-of-Design: Bobrick B-824 Counter-Mounted SureFlo Automatic Top-Fill Bulk
Liquid Soap Dispenser or architect approved equivalent. Other equivalent
manufacturer’s include but are not limited to:
a. Bradley Corporation
b. American Specialties
C. Grab Bar GBA, GBB, GBC:
1. Basis-of-Design: Bobrick Model # B-5806 Series or architect approved equivalent.
Other equivalent manufacturer’s include but are not limited to:
a. Bradley Corporation
b. American Specialties
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
5. Configuration and Length:
a. GBA: Horizontal, 36 inch length.
b. GBB: Horizontal, 42 inch length.
c. GBC: Vertical, 18 inch length.
D. Toilet Paper Dispenser – TPD1:
1. Basis-of-Design Bobrick B-4388 Recessed Multi-roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser
2. Mounting: Recessed
3. Material: Stainless Steel
2.3 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES (For Shower 225, 226 and 227)
A. Waste Receptacle – WR2:
1. Basis-of-Design Safeco Model #9685SS 4 gal. Step-On Can or architect approved
equivalent.
2. Mounting: Freestanding.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3
3. Minimum Capacity: 4 gal.
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
5. Liner: Rigid plastic liner with built-in bag retainer.
B. Toilet Paper Dispenser – TPD2:
1. Basis-of-Design Bobrick B-6637 Recessed Toilet Tissue Dispenser with Storage Space
for Extra Roll.
2. Mounting: Recessed
3. Material: Satin Stainless Steel
C. Towel Bar – TB:
1. Basis-of-Design WingIts Infinite Elegance Towel Bar (WIETB).
2. Size: 18”
3. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel
4. Mounting: Surface
D. Robe Hook – RH:
1. Basis-of-Design WingIts Max Elegance Single Button Robe Hook (WXESBRH)
2. Finish: Satin Stainless Steel
3. Mounting: Surface
E. Shower Rod – SCR:
1. Basis-of-Design Bobrick B-207 Heavy Duty Shower Curtain Rod with Concealed
Mounting
2. Accessories: Shower Curtain Hook, Basis-of-Design Bobrick 204-1Stainless Steel
Shower Curtain Hook. Provide 12 Hooks.
2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS
A. High-Speed Warm-Air Dryer HD:
1. Basis-of-Design: Dyson Airblade V
2. Description: High-speed, warm-air hand dryer for rapid hand drying.
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.
4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with hand sensor.
5. Cover Material and Finish: AB12 Sprayed Nickel.
6. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 12 A, 60 Hz, 1400 W, Single Phase, cULus listed.
2.5 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder MS:
1. Basis-of-Design Bobrick B-239
2. Description: Unit shelf with Mop/Broom Holders and Rag Hooks.
3. Length: 34 inches.
4. Hooks: Four.
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless steel.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
END OF SECTION 10 2800
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4410 - 1
SECTION 10 4410 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire extinguishers and cabinets as shown on the drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of fire
extinguisher and cabinet required. Include dimensions and clearances required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Standards:
1. Provide fire extinguishers conforming to NFPA Standard No. 10 and bearing UL label.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND CABINET MANUFACTURERS:
A. J. L. Industries
B. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. Provide one fire extinguisher and cabinet in office area at location indicated on drawings.
Provide one fire extinguisher with wall mounting bracket in garage at location indicated on
drawings.
B. Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations as shown on the
drawings. Furnish only new fire extinguishers which are approved and labeled by Underwriter's
Laboratories.
C. Provide colors and finishes of materials for portable fire extinguishers as selected by the
Architect from manufacturer's standard.
D. Fill and service extinguishers in accordance with governing authorities.
E. Provide required type mounting brackets for wall-mounted extinguishers and those located in
cabinets requiring brackets.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 4410 - 2
F. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical: 10 pound capacity, enameled steel container with pressure-
indicating gauge, for Class 4A:60B:C.
2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS:
A. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets suitable for housing one standard 10 pound size fire
extinguisher as follows:
1. Provide clear anodized aluminum cabinet with vertical glass overlap panel doors. Provide
Safety locking door or break-glass entry.
2. Corner Construction: Welded, Seamless Corners.
3. Mounting:
a. In 6” deep or greater wall: Fully Recessed.
b. In less than 6” deep wall: Semi-Recessed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Install in locations and at mounting height to comply with governing authorities. If authorities
have no requirements, mount at 2'-6" to bottom of cabinet, unless otherwise indicated on
drawings. Coordinate recesses with carpentry, masonry or framing trades as appropriate.
Prepare recesses in walls as required. Securely fasten items to structure, square and plumb, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Maintain fire rating of wall, if any.
B. Wherever exact location of units is not shown, locate as directed by Architect.
C. Fill and charge extinguishers just prior to substantial completion.
3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A. Clean fire extinguisher cabinets and repair minor damage to finishes. Replace units damaged
beyond satisfactory repair as determined by Architect.
B. Advise Contractor of protection measures necessary to protect fire extinguishers and cabinets
during subsequent construction.
END OF SECTION 10 4410
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 1
SECTION 10 5113 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Welded lockers.
2. Knock Down Grid Lockers and Accessories.
3. Locker benches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and
locker identification system and numbering sequence.
C. Samples: For each color specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal lockers that
fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Warranty Period for Welded Metal Lockers: Lifetime from date of Substantial
Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accessibility Requirements: For lockers indicated to be accessible, comply with applicable
provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA
Accessibility Guidelines and ICC A117.1.
2.2 WELDED LOCKERS in Uniform Lockers 221
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Penco Gear Lockers or equivalent by one of the manufacturer’s listed
below:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DeBourgh Mfg. Co; Angle Iron Corridor.
b. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC; All-Welded.
c. Olympus Lockers & Storage Products, Inc; Hercules.
d. Republic Storage Systems Company; All-Welded Ventilated.
B. Size: Single, 18 inches wide x 18 inches deep, and height of 72 inches.
D. Doors, Double Doors; fabricated from 0.075-inch (1.90-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet;
formed into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges and with right-angle single bend
at horizontal edges.
1. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or stiffeners for
doors more than 15 inches (381 mm) wide; welded to inner face of doors.
2. Door Style: Vented panel as follows:
a. Louvered Vents with Mini Louver Style.
3. Provide manufacturer’s standard quiet close mechanism for reduced noise.
E. Body: Assembled by welding body components together. Fabricate from unperforated steel
sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Sides: 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal thickness.
2. Backs: 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal thickness.
3. Shelves: 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal thickness, with double bend at front and single
bend at sides and back.
F. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet;
lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into
vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral, full-height door strikes on vertical main
frames.
G. Hinges:
1. Continuous Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel, full height.
H. Recessed Door Handle and Latch:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 3
a. Manufacturer's standard, rattle-free latching mechanism.
I. Locks: Manufacturer’s standard.
J. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard, etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates,
with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch (9 mm) high.
1. Start at number 1 in the SW corner.
K. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.
L. Full width hat shelf.
M. Full width lower shelf.
N. Continuous Zee Base: Fabricated from, manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than
0.060-inch (1.52-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
1. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
O. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet,
with a pitch of approximately 20 degrees.
1. Closures: Hipped-end type.
P. Filler Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
Q. Boxed End Panels: Fabricated from 0.048-inch (1.21-mm) nominal-thickness steel sheet.
R. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B,
suitable for exposed applications.
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with A60 (ZF180) zinc-iron, alloy (galvannealed) coating designation.
S. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 KNOCKED-DOWN GEAR LOCKERS, In Ready Room 113
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mid Minnesota
Wire, Gear Grid Fire Locker system and accessories as shown on drawings or Architect
approved Equal.
1. Deep Wall Mount Cubbies.
a. Size (locations as shown on drawings):
1) 24 inches deep by 24 inches wide by 72 inches tall
2) 24 inches deep by 36 inches wide by 72 inches tall
b. Options:
1) Backboard Rack and Basket in location shown on drawings
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 4
2) Power Bar in location shown on drawings
3) Extra Shelves: 2 per each cubby, except at backboard rack and basket and
oxygen storage
4) Top Side Storage at all locations except backboard rack and basket
5) Doors at area of oxygen storage as shown on drawings
2. Slinger Topside Storage Shelf
a. Size: 18 inches deep by 72 inches wide by 8 inches tall
3. Slinger Tool Grid.
a. Size 1 ¼ inches deep by 24 inches wide by 72 inches tall
b. Options:
1) 4 large tool hangers
2) 2 four prong racks
4. Mini Mobile Storage
a. Option: O2 storage shelves
5. Double Slinger Work Station, with no upper unit. Work surface and storage underneath
only.
B. Construction: Units shall be welded at all applicable joints. Forming of metal shall be
completed by standard cold-forming operations. Use of fasteners will only be required to allow
for knock-down shipping, securing units to mounting surface and on applicable accessories.
1. Vertical Dividers:
a. Outer Frames: 1.25” O.D. x 16 gauge wall thickness ASTM A513 steel tubing.
b. Inner Grid: .25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance welded to a
3” square pattern.
2. Back Panel:
a. Grid: .25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance welded to a 3”
square pattern.
3. Shelves: (1) Top, (1) Bottom. .25” diameter ASTM 510 cold drawn steel wire resistance
welded and cold formed. Top shelf includes a 20 gauge steel bracket to accept a 2” x 16”
name placard.
4. Base Assembly: Base frame shall be manufactured from 1.25” x 11 gauge wall thickness
ASTM A513 square steel tubing. Provide adjustable foot where required.
C. Finish: Powder coat.
1. Components to be cleaned using a phosphatized bath, clear water rinse and electro-
statically coated with a durable TGIC powder coating.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 LOCKER BENCHES, In Uniform Lockers 221
A. Provide bench units with overall assembly height of 17-1/2 inches (445 mm).
B. Bench Tops: Manufacturer's standard one-piece units, with rounded corners and edges.
1. Size: 9 inches wide by 1-1/4 inches thick (241 mm wide by 32 mm thick).
2. Laminated clear hardwood with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces and one coat of
clear lacquer on top and sides.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 5
C. Fixed Pedestals: Manufacturer's standard tubular steel supports, with predrilled fastener holes
for attaching bench top and anchoring to floor, complete with fasteners and anchors.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500 M, cold rolled.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, without warp, and with metal faces flat and free of dents
or distortion. Make exposed metal edges safe to touch and free of sharp edges and burrs.
B. Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame; individual top, bottom, and
back; and common intermediate uprights separating compartments. Factory weld frame
members of each metal locker together to form a rigid, one-piece assembly.
C. Equipment: Provide each locker with an identification plate and the following equipment:
1. Single Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.
2. Coat Rods: For each compartment of each locker.
D. Knocked-Down Gear Locker Construction: Fabricate lockers using manufacturer’s standard
hardware.
E. Welded Construction: Factory preassemble metal lockers by welding all joints, seams, and
connections; with no bolts, nuts, screws, or rivets used in assembly of main locker groups.
Factory weld main locker groups into one-piece structures. Grind exposed welds flush.
F. Accessible Lockers: Fabricate as follows:
1. Locate bottom shelf no lower than 15 inches (381 mm) above the floor.
2. Where hooks, coat rods, or additional shelves are provided, locate no higher than 48
inches (1219 mm) above the floor.
G. Continuous Base: Formed into zee profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as long as
practical to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
H. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practical, without visible fasteners at
splice locations; finished to match lockers.
I. Filler Panels: Fabricated in an unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. Provide slip-
joint filler angle formed to receive filler panel.
J. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners, except for
perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
METAL LOCKERS 10 5113 - 6
K. Center Dividers: Full-depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match
lockers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install lockers level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more
than 36 inches (910 mm) o.c. Using concealed fasteners, install anchors through backup
reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top [and bottom of lockers] [of lockers
and to floor].
3. Anchor back-to-back metal lockers to floor.
B. Knocked-Down Gear Lockers: Assemble with manufacturer’s hardware.
C. Welded Lockers: Connect groups together with standard fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on
face frames.
D. Trim: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight,
hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1. Attach recess trim to recessed metal lockers with concealed clips.
2. Attach filler panels with concealed fasteners.
3. Attach sloping-top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.
E. Fixed Locker Benches: Provide no fewer than two pedestals for each bench, uniformly spaced
not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) apart.
END OF SECTION 10 5113
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3100 - 1
SECTION 11 3100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Cooking appliances.
a. Range
b. Microwave
c. Coffee Maker
2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation.
3. Refrigeration appliances.
4. Dishwasher.
5. Cleaning appliances including:
a. Washer
b. Dryer
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics, dimensions
of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.
B. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each appliance
specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on defects in the
magnetron tube.
2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the sealed
refrigeration system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
B. Gas-Fueled Appliances: Certified by a qualified testing agency for each type of gas-fueled
appliance according to ANSI Z21 Series standards.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3100 - 2
2.2 COOKING APPLIANCES
A. RANGES
1. Gas Range [RANGE]: Freestanding with oven.
a. Basis-of-Design Product, Wolf 36 inch Gas Range, Model #GR366
b. Gas Burners: Six.
c. Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard.
d. Material: Stainless steel with manufacturer's standard cooktop.
e. Accessories:
1) Stainless Steel Kick Plate
2) Black Knobs
B. MICROWAVE
1. Microwave [MW]: Countertop Convection / Microwave Oven
a. Basis-of-Design Product, GE Profile Series 1.5 Cu. Ft. Countertop Convection /
Microwave Oven Model # PEB9159SJSS
b. Finish: Stainless Steel
C. COFFEE MAKER
1. Coffee Maker: Commercial, Plumbed Coffee Maker
a. Basis-of-Design Product, Bunn Axiom-DV-3 (2U/1L Warmer) Model #
38700.0008.
b. Electrical: 120V with standard plug type.
c. Plumbing:
1) PSI: 20-90
2) kPa: 138-621
3) Fitting Supplied: ¼” Male Flare Fitting
d. Accessories:
1) Black Plastic Funnel #20583.0003
2) Water Filter System: TBD
3) Decanter, 2 black and one orange
2.3 KITCHEN EXHAUST VENTILATION
A. Overhead Exhaust Hood [RANGE HOOD]:
1. Basis-of-Design Product, Wolf 36” Cooktop Wall Hood Model # VW36S
2. Type: Wall-mounted exhaust-hood system.
3. Exhaust Fan: Variable-speed fan remotely located, with separate housing and with 600-
cfm (425-L/s) capacity.
a. Venting: Vented to outside through roof.
b. Blower: Re, Mechanical.
4. Finish: Stainless steel.
5. Accessories: 38” High stainless steel backsplash.
2.4 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3100 - 3
A. Full Size Refrigerator, 25.8 cu. Ft. Side by Side Refrigerator:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: GE® ENERGY STAR® 25.8 Cu. Ft. French-Door Style
Refrigerator GFE26GSKSS or Architect approved equal.
B. Under Counter Refrigerator:
1. Medical Storage: Summit Appliance ALB753LBLSSHH with factory installed lock and
stainless steel door.
2. Training Room: Summit Appliance AL57G with factory installed lock and glass door
with stainless steel trim.
2.5 DISHWASHERS
A. Dishwasher [DW]: Complying with AHAM DW-1.
1. Basis-of-Design Product GE Profile Model # PDT750SSFSS
2. Type: Built-in under counter.
3. ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR
product-labeling program.
4. Front Panel: Stainless steel.
2.6 CLOTHES WASHERS AND DRYERS
A. Clothes Washer - WASHER: Complying with AHAM HLW-1.
1. Basis-of-Design LG Ultra Large Capacity Front Load Washer with Cold Wash
Technology Model # WM3270CW White or architect approved equivalent.
2. Type: front-loading unit. Capacity: 4.5 cu ft.
3. Agitator: Impeller (without spindle).
4. ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR
product-labeling program.
5. Water-Efficient Clothes Washer: Provide clothes washer with modified energy factor
greater than or equal to 2.0 and water factor less than 5.5.
6. Appliance Finish: Enamel.
7. Front-Panel Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Clothes Dryer- DRYER: Complying with AHAM HLD-1.
1. Basis-of-Design LG Ultra Large Capacity Dryer with NFC Tag on Technology Model #
DLE3170W White or architect approved equivalent.
2. Type: Stacking unit.
3. Capacity: 7.4 cu. ft.
4. Features:
a. Interior drum light.
5. Appliance Finish: Enamel.
6. Front-Panel Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3100 - 4
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C. Stainless-Steel Finish: Provide appliances with manufacturer's standard finish complying with
manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including ground and polished
stainless-steel surfaces for uniform, directionally textured finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary
adjustments.
B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready
for operation.
END OF SECTION 11 3100
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 1
SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manually operated roller shades.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mechoshade or
comparable product by one of the following:
1. Draper Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas Contract.
3. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.
4. Nysan Solar Control Inc.; Hunter Douglas Company.
2.2 ROLLER SHADES
A. Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1. Bead Chains: Stainless steel.
a. Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
b. Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
c. Chain-Retainer Type: Chain tensioner, jamb mounted.
2. Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade
weight and lifting heavy roller shades.
a. Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 4.5 kg (10 lb) or for shades as
recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.
B. Rollers: Corrosion-resistant steel or extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses
required to accommodate operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands
indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and
idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1. Roller Mounting Configuration: Single roller and Double roller, offset with outside roller
over and inside roller under.
2. Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
4. Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Manufacturer's standard method.
C. Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
D. Roller-Coupling Assemblies: Coordinated with operating mechanism and designed to join up to
three inline rollers into a multiband shade that is operated by one roller drive-end assembly.
E. Shadebands:
1. Shadeband Material:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 3
a. Light-filtering fabric where indicated on drawings.
b. Light-blocking fabric where indicated on drawings.
2. Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
a. Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material.
F. Installation Accessories:
1. Front Fascia: Aluminum extrusion that conceals front and underside of roller and
operating mechanism and attaches to roller endcaps without exposed fasteners.
a. Shape: L-shaped.
b. Height: Manufacturer's standard height required to conceal roller and shadeband
when shade is fully open.
2. Endcap Covers: To cover exposed endcaps.
3. Closure Panel and Wall Clip: Removable aluminum panel designed for installation at
bottom of site-constructed ceiling recess or pocket and for snap-in attachment to wall clip
without fasteners.
a. Closure-Panel Width: Manufacturer’s recommended.
4. Side Channels: With light seals and designed to eliminate light gaps at sides of shades as
shades are drawn down. Provide side channels with shadeband guides or other means of
aligning shadebands with channels at tops. Provide side channels at light blocking shades
only.
5. Bottom (Sill) Channel or Angle: With light seals as designed to eliminate light gaps at
bottoms of shades when shades are closed. Light seal hem bars at locations with light
blocking fabric only.
6. Installation Accessories Color and Finish: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A. Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B. Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant. Basis-of-Design, 1000 Series
Vertical Weave.
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
2. Type: 79% Vinyl, 21% Polyester core
3. Weave: Vertical
4. Roll Width: 63 inches (160cm) and 96 inches (244cm) wide.
5. Orientation on Shadeband: As recommended by manufacturer.
6. Openness Factor: 2-3%
7. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Light-Blocking Fabric: Opaque fabric, stain and fade resistant. Basis-of-Design, 0200 Series
Midnite Blackout.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 4
1. Source: Roller-shade manufacturer.
2. Type: 73% Acrylic (coating), 27% polyester (yarn)
3. Roll Width: 126 inches (320cm)
4. Orientation on Shadeband: As recommended by manufacturer.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 23
deg C (74 deg F):
1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening
in which shade is installed less 6 mm (1/4 inch) per side or 13-mm (1/2-inch) total, plus
or minus 3.1 mm (1/8 inch). Length equal to head-to-sill or -floor dimension of opening
in which shade is installed less 6 mm (1/4 inch), plus or minus 3.1 mm (1/8 inch).
C. Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible except
as follows:
1. Vertical Shades: Where width-to-length ratio of shadeband is equal to or greater than 1:4,
provide battens and seams at uniform spacings along shadeband length to ensure
shadeband tracking and alignment through its full range of movement without distortion
of the material.
2. Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required
width of shadeband and where indicated. No battens. If the material is chosen to be
railroaded, railroad all of the shades; do not provide a mix of regular and railroaded
material.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
C. Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Opaque Shadebands: Located so shadeband is not closer than 50 mm (2 inches) to
interior face of glass. Allow clearances for window operation hardware.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES 12 2413 - 5
D. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 4 - SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 1
SECTION 12 3600 – STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stainless steel material countertops and backsplashes as shown in drawings over plastic
laminate faced architectural cabinet base or on wall mounted brackets.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS
A. Stainless Steel Material: ASTM A167, Type 316. Cold rolled, stretcher leveled.
B. Substrate Material: Plywood exterior grade sanded BC, not less than five ply construction.
C. Adhesive: Type recommended for bonding stainless steel to substrate, fully adhered without
voids.
D. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Straight, with marine edge as shown on drawings.
2. Backsplash: standard 4.5 inch height with 45degree sloping return, 1 inch thick.
3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash profile.
E. Countertops: 16 gauge stainless steel with electro-polished finish.
F. Backsplashes: stainless steel to match countertop with profile as indicated above.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Countertop Support Bracket:
1. A & M Hardware Hybrid Bracket 18x18 installed with a concealed mount.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 2
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in largest sections practicable, up to 12 feet long. Include nosing, backs and ends.
B. Finish thickness at edges to be 1-1/4 inch thick.
C. Fabricate with joints flush on top surface, ground smooth and hairline. Blend welds into finish.
D. Apply sound deadening material where underside does not have solid substrate.
E. Ease or hem all exposed edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installing countertops verify that wall surfaces have been finished as specified and that
mechanical and electrical service locations are in place as required.
B. Field verify millwork and rough opening sizes for fit prior to fabrication of countertop.
C. Backsplash to be secured to receiving continuous cleat unless mounted to solid substrate.
D. Clean countertop and correct any blemishes or scratches to blend with surface finish specified.
E. Caulk backsplash and sides of countertop continuous to wall as per section 07 9200 with clear
silicone.
END OF SECTION 12 3600
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1
SECTION 12 3661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles,
methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:
1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top.
2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. Endsplash: Matching backsplash.
B. Countertops: 12.7-mm- (1/2-inch-) thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with
same material.
C. Backsplashes: 12.7-mm- (1/2-inch-) thick, solid surface material.
2.2 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
B. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch
sanded.
C. Adhesives: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 2
D. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
ANSI SS.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by:
a. Basis-of-Design: E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company or architect approved
equivalent. Equivalent manufacturers include, but are not limited to:
1) Avonite
2) Formica
3) Wilsonart
4) LG HI-Macs
5) Samsung Staron
6) Swanstone
7) Hanex
2. Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
3. Colors and Patterns: As scheduled on drawings.
E. Accessories: Concealed Countertop Bracket, Basis-of-Design A&M Hybrid Bracket 18 x 18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form
seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth,
remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.
END OF SECTION 12 3661
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 1
SECTION 12 4813 - ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Recessed entrance mats.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:
1. Items penetrating floor mats, including the following:
a. Door control devices.
2. Divisions between mat sections.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated.
1. Floor Mat: 300-mm- (12-inch-) square, assembled sections of floor mat.
2. Tread Rail: 300-mm- (12-inch-) long Sample of each type and color.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5 in the
U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." and Sections 302
and 303 in ICC A117.1.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to receive
floor mats and frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENTRANCE MATS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kadee Industries
ENTEC-58 grating with carpet inserts, hidden locking devices, stainless steel frame or an
architect approved equal.
1. Finish: 304 Stainless Steel
2. Rolling Load Test to 500 lbs.
2.2 CONCRETE FILL AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Provide concrete grout and fill equivalent in strength to cast-in-place concrete slabs for recessed
mats and frames. Use aggregate no larger than one-third fill thickness.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for maintenance and cleaning. Where
joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter
corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units
without joints.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: Type 304 stainless steel for surface wires and support bars.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location, sizes,
minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats and frames.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12 4813 - 3
A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set mat tops at
height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat
surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door and
mat.
1. For installation in polished concrete flooring areas, provide allowance for grinding and
polishing of concrete without grinding surface of recessed frames. Coordinate with other
trades as required.
2. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure
attachment of frames.
3. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper elevations, in
recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or
fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection
until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12 4813
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 1
SECTION 14 2400 - MACHINE ROOM-LESS HYDRAULIC PASSENGER ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Machine room-less hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified.
Elevator work includes:
1. Standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators.
2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment.
3. Operation and control systems.
4. Jack(s).
5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons.
6. Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the
specified elevators at their rated speed and capacity.
7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 3 Concrete: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete.
2. Division 4 Masonry: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry.
3. Division 5 Metals:
a. Providing hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider
beams for supporting guide-rail brackets.
b. Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames.
4. Division 9 Finishes: Providing elevator car finish flooring and field painting unfinished
and shop primed ferrous materials.
5. Division 22 Plumbing
a. Sump pit and oil interceptor.
6. Division 23 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
a. Heating and ventilating hoistways and/or control room.
7. Division 26 Sections:
a. Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches where
permitted. (note: fused disconnect switch to be provided as part of elevator
manufacture product, see section 2.11 Miscellaneous elevator components for further
details.)
b. Emergency power supply, transfer switch and auxiliary contacts.
c. Heat and smoke sensing devices.
d. Convenience outlets and illumination in control room (if applicable), hoistway and
pit.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: When requested, the elevator contractor shall provide standard cab, entrance and
signal fixture data to describe product for approval.
B. Shop drawings:
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 2
1. Show equipment arrangement in the corridor, pit, and hoistway and/or optional control
room. Provide plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage,
and equipment location.
2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes and
other pertinent information.
3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at
points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work.
4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device
recommendations.
C. Powder Coat paint selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed
finishes and materials.
D. Plastic laminate selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard selection charts for exposed finishes
and materials.
E. Metal Finishes: Upon request, standard metal samples provided.
F. Operation and maintenance data. Include the following:
1. Owner’s manuals and wiring diagrams.
2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer with minimum 15 years of experience in
manufacturing, installing, and servicing elevators of the type required for the project.
1. The manufacturer of machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators cabs,
entrances, and all other major parts of elevator operating equipment.
a. The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured by the installing
company, and not be an assembled system.
2. The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program.
3. ISO-9001:2000 Manufacturer Certified
4. ISO-14001:2004 Environmental Management System Certified
5. LEED Gold certified elevator manufacturing facility.
B. Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not
less than 15 years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and
performance to the project elevators.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by
the local building code.
2. Building Code: National.
3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 3
5. Americans with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)
6. Section 407 in ICC A117.1, when required by local authorities
7. CAN/CSA C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code
8. CAN/CSA B44 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators.
9. California Department of Public Health Standard Method V1.1–2010, CA Section 01350
D. Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and
operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-S104 (ULC-S104), UL10(b), and NFPA
Standard 80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 1/2 hour label by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada).
E. Inspection and testing:
1. Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and fees
for elevator installation.
2. Arrange for inspections and make required tests.
3. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturing shall deliver elevator materials, components and equipment and the contractor is
responsible to provide secure and safe storage on job site.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Use: Elevators shall not be used for temporary service or for any other purpose during
the construction period before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the purchaser unless
agreed upon by Elevator Contractor and General Contractor with signed temporary agreement.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or
replace defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or
improper use or care for 24 months after manufacturing ship date.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 3 months for each elevator after
completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier, during
normal working hours excluding callbacks.
1. Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment, lubrication,
cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation. Maintenance work,
including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed by trained employees of
the elevator contractor during regular working hours.
2. Submit parts catalog and show evidence of local parts inventory with complete list of
recommended spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original
equipment.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 4
3. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 100 mile
radius of the project site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Design based around thyssenkrupp Elevator’s endura Machine Room-Less
hydraulic elevator.
2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Colors, patterns, and finishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of
standard colors, patterns, and finishes.
B. Steel:
1. Shapes and bars: Carbon.
2. Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class 1, matte finish.
3. Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel for structural parts, powder coat for architectural
parts. Color selection must be based on elevator manufacture’s standard selections.
C. Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP-50
General Purpose Grade, nominal 0.050" thickness. Laminate selection must be based on elevator
manufacture’s standard selections.
D. Flooring by others.
2.03 HOISTWAY EQUIPMENT
A. Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with
a wood sub-floor. Underside of the platform shall be fireproofed. The car platform shall be
designed and fabricated to support one-piece loads weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity.
B. Sling: Steel stiles bolted or welded to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to
remove strain from the car enclosure.
C. Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building structure with steel brackets.
D. Guides: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car.
E. Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous channels
fastened to the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if
required by project conditions.
F. Jack: A jack unit shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test
jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 5
iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless
telescopic 2-stage. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with each
having two telescopic sections designed to extend in a synchronized manner when oil is pumped
into the assembly. Each jack section will be guided from within the casing or the plunger
assembly used to house the section. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which
will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. Each jack
assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing
the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. The jack shall be
designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have
a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section..
G. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically
bring the car to the floor landings and correct for over travel or under travel. Self-leveling shall,
within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be
maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load.
H. Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National
Electrical Code. All necessary code compliant pipe and fittings shall be provided to connect the
power unit to the jack unit.
I. Pit moisture/water sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor to be provided. Once
activated, elevator will perform “flooded pit operation”, which will run the car up to the
designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3
phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment.
J. Motorized oil line shut-off valve shall be provided that can be remotely operated from the
controller landing service panel. Also a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit is
required.
2.04 POWER UNIT
A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): A self-contained unit located in the elevator
pit consisting of the following items:
1. NEMA 4/Sealed Oil reservoir with tank cover including vapor removing tank breather
2. An oil hydraulic pump.
3. An electric motor.
4. Electronic oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high
pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and
leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids.
B. Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator
service. Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and
quiet operation. Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full
load on the elevator car.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 6
C. Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty
rating – motors shall be capable of 80 starts per hour with a 30% motor run time during each start.
D. Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded
manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable. Adjustments shall
be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line.
1. Relief valve shall be adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without
increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the
valve.
2. Up start and stop valve shall be adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start
and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or
from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops.
3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse
flow.
4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be adjustable for down start speed, lowering
speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The
leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is
traveling after slowdown is initiated.
5. Provided with constant speed regulation in both up and down direction. Feature to
compensate for load changes, oil temperature, and viscosity changes.
6. Solid State Starting: Provide an electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents.
7. A secondary hydraulic power source (powered by 110VAC single phase) must be
provided. This is required to be able to raise (reposition) the elevator in the event of a
system component failure (i.e. pump motor, starter, etc.)
8. Oil Type: Provide zinc free, inherently biodegradable lubricant formulated with premium
base stocks to provide outstanding protection for demanding hydraulic systems,
especially those operating in environmentally sensitive areas.
2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway
opening bolted\knock down construction.
1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of hangers, doors, hanger supports,
hanger covers, fascia plates (where required), sight guards, and necessary hardware.
2. Main landing door & frame finish: ASTM A1008 steel panels, factory applied powder coat
finish.
3. Typical door & frame finish: ASTM A 366 steel panels, factory applied powder coat
finish.
B. Integrated Control System: the elevator controller to be mounted to hoistway entrance above 1st
landing. The entrance at this level, shall be designed to accommodate the control system and
provide a means of access to critical electrical components and troubleshooting features. See
section 2.09 Control System for additional requirements.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 7
C. At the controller landing, the hoistway entrance frame shall have space to accommodate and
provide a lockable means of access (group 2 security) to a 3 phase circuit breaker. See section
2.11 Miscellaneous Elevator Components for further details
D. Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by
code. Provide door restriction devices as required by code.
E. Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each
hoistway horizontal sliding door.
1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease.
2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable device beneath the track to limit the up-thrust of the doors
during operation.
3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger
sheaves.
F. Hoistway Sills: Extruded metal, with groove(s) in top surface. Provide mill finish on aluminum.
2.06 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURE
A. Car Enclosure:
1. Walls: Cab type a steel shell design, reinforced cold-rolled steel with an applied panel
design. The applied panels design, shall be arranged vertically on wood core panels covered
on both sides with stainless steel: ASTM A 167, No. 4 brushed finish. Applied panels shall
be removable.
2. Reveals and frieze: Stainless steel, No. 4 brushed finish
3. Canopy: Cold-rolled steel with hinged exit.
4. Ceiling: Suspended type, LED lighting with translucent diffuser mounted in a metal
frame. Framework shall be finished with a stainless steel, no. 4 brushed finish.
5. Cab Fronts, Return, Transom, Soffit and Strike: Provide panels faced with No. 4 brushed
stainless steel
6. Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors
on sheave type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are
guided at the bottom by non-metallic sliding guides.
a. Door Finish: Stainless steel panels: No. 4 brushed finish.
b. Cab Sills: Extruded aluminum, mill finish.
7. Handrail: Provide 1.5'' diameter cylindrical metal on side and rear walls on front opening
cars and side walls only on front and rear opening cars. Handrails shall have a stainless
steel, No. 4 brushed finish.
8. Ventilation: Manufacturer’s standard exhaust fan, mounted on the car top.
9. Protection pads and buttons: Provide one set of vinyl protection pads with metal
grommets for the project. Provide pad buttons on cab front(s) and walls.
B. Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an “Auto-Inspection” switch, an
"emergency stop" switch, and constant pressure "up and down" direction and safety buttons to
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 8
make the normal operating devices inoperative. The station shall give the inspector complete
control of the elevator. The car top inspection station shall be mounted in the door operator
assembly.
2.07 DOOR OPERATION
A. Door Operation: Provide a direct or alternating current motor driven heavy duty operator
designed to operate the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. The door control system shall be
digital closed loop and the closed loop circuit shall give constant feedback on the position and
velocity of the elevator door. The motor torque shall be constantly adjusted to maintain the
correct door speed based on its position and load. All adjustments and setup shall be through the
computer based service tool. Door movements shall follow a field programmable speed pattern
with smooth acceleration and deceleration at the ends of travel. The mechanical door operating
mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors shall
automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable
time interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. AC controlled units with oil
checks, or other deviations are not acceptable.
1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: The car door shall open only if the car is stopping for
a car or hall call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as a
dispatch car.
2. Door Open Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no
coincident hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field
programmable time when the electronic door protection device is activated.
3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall
calls, no car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the
hall call in the direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered
before the door closes to within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel shall reverse and the
door shall reopen to answer the other call.
4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses
the presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door closing is prevented for
a field programmable time, a buzzer shall sound. When the obstruction is removed, the
door shall begin to close at reduced speed. If the infra-red door protection system detects
a person or object while closing on nudging, the doors shall stop and resume closing only
after the obstruction has been removed.
5. Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and the infra-red beam(s) is interrupted, the doors
shall reverse and reopen. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors shall begin to close.
6. Door Open Watchdog: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field
adjustable time, the doors shall recycle closed then attempt to open six times to try and
correct the fault.
7. Door Close Watchdog: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field
adjustable time, the doors shall recycle open then attempt to close six times to try and
correct the fault.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 9
8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode,
the door drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome
mechanical resistance or differential air pressure and allow the door to close.
B. Door Protection Device: Provide a door protection system using microprocessor controlled infra-
red light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a
passenger or object. If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen.
2.08 CAR OPERATING STATION
A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices
required for specific operation mounted in an integral swing return panel requiring no applied
faceplate. Wrap return shall have a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish. The main car operating
panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons that
illuminate using long lasting LED’s shall be included for each floor served, and emergency
buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories shall be
provided.
B. Emergency Communications System: Integral phone system provided.
C. Auxiliary Operating Panel: Not Required
D. Column Mounted Car Riding Lantern: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and
located in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel.
The lantern will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop.
The lantern shall remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close.
E. Special Equipment: Not Applicable
2.09 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Controller: Shall be integrated in a hoistway entrance jamb. Should be microprocessor based,
software oriented and protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations in a
NEMA 1 enclosure. Control of the elevator shall be automatic in operation by means of push
buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for registering car stops, and by "up-
down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons at terminal landings.
B. Service Panel – to be located outside the hoistway in the controller entrance jamb and shall
provide the following functionality/features:
1. Access to main control board and CPU
2. Main controller diagnostics
3. Main controller fuses
4. Universal Interface Tool (UIT)
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 10
5. Remote valve adjustment
6. Electronic motor starter adjustment and diagnostics
7. Operation of pit motorized shut-off valve with LED feedback to the state of the valve in
the pit
8. Operation of auxiliary pump/motor (secondary hydraulic power source)
9. Operation of electrical assisted manual lowering
10. Provide male plug to supply 110VAC into the controller
11. Run/Stop button
C. Automatic Light and Fan shut down: The control system shall evaluate the system activity and
automatically turn off the cab lighting and ventilation fan during periods of inactivity. The
settings shall be field programmable.
D. Emergency Power Operation: Full automatic operation (Simplex 10-D4A) Upon loss of the normal
power supply, building-supplied standby power is available to the elevator on the same wires as the
normal power. Once the loss of normal power has been detected and standby power is available, the
elevator is lowered to a pre-designated landing and will open the doors. After passengers have
exited the elevator, the doors are closed. At this time the elevator is automatically allowed to
continue service using the building-supplied standby power.
2.10 HALL STATIONS
A. Hall Stations, General: Provide buttons with red-illuminating LED halos to indicate that a call has
been registered at that floor for the indicated direction. Provide 1 set of pushbutton risers.
1. Provide one pushbutton riser with faceplates having a No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish.
a. Phase 1 firefighter’s service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into
the hall station at the designated level.
B. Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
C. Hall Position Indicator: An electronic dot matrix position indicator shall be provided and mounted
for optimum viewing. As the car travels, its position in the hoistway shall be indicated by the
illumination of the alphanumeric character corresponding to the landing which the elevator is
stopped or passing. When hall lanterns are provided, the position indicator shall be combined with
the hall lanterns in the same faceplate. Faceplates shall match hall stations. Provide at all typical
landings.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS
A. Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install multiple oil hydraulic silencers (muffler device) at the power unit
location. The silencers shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof
housing.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 11
B. Lockable three phase circuit breaker with auxiliary contact with shunt trip capability to be
provided. Circuit breaker to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at
controller landing entrance jamb and should be sized according to the National Electrical Code.
C. Lockable single phase 110V circuit breaker for cab light and fan to be provided. Circuit breaker
to be located behind locked panel (Group 2 security access) at controller landing entrance jamb
should be sized according to the National Electrical Code
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and/or control
room, as constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all
other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with elevator
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
installer.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory
performance.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.
1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with
ASME A17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.
2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation.
B. Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the
elevator manufacturer's experienced foreman.
C. Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets,
supports, and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement.
D. Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment,
inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for
workmanship and for qualification of welding operators.
E. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and
sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the
Contractor, to ensure dimensional coordination of the work.
F. Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet,
smoothly operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration.
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 12
G. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails
for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and
doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at
each landing.
H. Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascia
and toe guards after rough walls finished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above
finish floor at landings.
I. Lubricate operating parts of system, where recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of
elevator, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing
regulations or agencies. Perform other tests, if any, as required by governing regulations or
agencies.
B. Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times
tests are to be performed on the elevator.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates
smoothly and accurately.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Before final acceptance, remove protection from finished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and finish provided.
Stainless steel shall be cleaned with soap and water and dried with a non-abrasive surface; it shall
not be cleaned with bleach-based cleansers.
B. At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean
equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris.
1. Use environmentally preferable and low VOC emitting cleaners for each application type.
Cleaners that contain solvents, pine and/or citrus oils are not permitted.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable
protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect
elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder
of construction period.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
06/08/2018
1740 – ASPEN AMBULANCE DISTRICT FACILITY Chamberlin Architects
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14 2400 - 13
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review
emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of
failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal
procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions.
B. Make a final check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately
before date of substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are
functioning properly.
3.08 ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
A. Elevator Qty. 1
1. Elevator Model: enduraMRL Above-Ground (2-Stage)
2. Elevator Type: Hydraulic Machine Room-Less, Passenger
3. Rated Capacity: 2500 lbs.
4. Rated Speed: 110 ft./min.
5. Operation System: TAC32H
6. Travel: 16'-0''
7. Landings: 2 total
8. Openings:
a. Front: 2
b. Rear: 0
9. Clear Car Inside: 6' - 8'' wide x 4' - 3'' deep
10. Cab Height: 8'-0'' standard
11. Hoistway Entrance Size: 3' - 6'' wide x 7'-0'' high
12. Door Type: Single Speed
13. Power Characteristics: 208 volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
14. Seismic Requirements: Zone 1
15. Hoistway Dimensions: 8' - 4'' wide x 5' - 9'' deep
16. Pit Depth: 4' - 0''
17. Button & Fixture Style: Signa4 Signal Fixtures
18. Special Operations: None
END OF SECTION 14 2400
06/08/2018